WO2023179670A1 - 用于处理信号的方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

用于处理信号的方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023179670A1
WO2023179670A1 PCT/CN2023/083086 CN2023083086W WO2023179670A1 WO 2023179670 A1 WO2023179670 A1 WO 2023179670A1 CN 2023083086 W CN2023083086 W CN 2023083086W WO 2023179670 A1 WO2023179670 A1 WO 2023179670A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time domain
sampling points
terminal device
signal
reference signal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/083086
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
焦瑞晟
何泓利
李雪茹
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202210806902.9A external-priority patent/CN116847391A/zh
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023179670A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023179670A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0408—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas using two or more beams, i.e. beam diversity
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically to methods and communication devices for processing signals in the field of communications.
  • two devices can transmit signals through directional beams in order to overcome the path loss in communication. Before two devices can transmit signals, they need to perform beam training. In the traditional beam training method, only one beam can be trained on one time domain symbol. When there are many beams to be trained, the time domain resources occupied by the training beams will increase, resulting in greater overhead for the training beams.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a method and communication device for signal processing, which can reduce the overhead of beam training.
  • a method for processing a signal is provided.
  • the method is applicable to a first device and includes: determining P resource elements among L resource elements, any two resource elements among the L resource elements.
  • the interval is an integer multiple of resource elements M.
  • the L resource elements are frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time domain symbol.
  • the L resource elements span the frequency domain resources of at least two devices.
  • the P resource elements Frequency domain resources belonging to the second device;
  • the first reference signal to be sent to the second device is mapped on the P resource elements, where resource elements other than the P resource elements among the L resource elements belong to the frequency domain of other devices. resources and does not send any signal, the at least two devices include the second device and the other device;
  • M, L and P are positive integers, and L is greater than or equal to P.
  • the first device can determine P resource elements among the L resource elements in the resource elements corresponding to the first time domain symbol, and map the first resource elements to be sent to the second device on the P resource elements. reference signal. Resource elements other than P resource elements among the L resource elements do not send any signals. Any two resource elements among the L resource elements are separated by an integer multiple of M resource elements, so that the first reference signal sent by the first device has a comb structure. At this time, the first reference signal received by the second device at a specific sampling point will not be interfered by signals mapped on resource elements other than L resource elements among the resource elements corresponding to the first time domain symbol.
  • the second device can measure the energy of different sampling points of the first reference signal on the first time domain symbol, thereby achieving measurement of different beams, which can not only improve the accuracy of the measurement beam, but also measure the energy of the first reference signal within one time domain symbol. Train multiple beams, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the first device may be a network device
  • the second device may be a first terminal device
  • the at least two devices may be at least two terminal devices.
  • the first device is a third terminal device
  • the second device is a fourth terminal device
  • at least two devices may be At least two terminal devices.
  • the first time domain symbol may be a first orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • the P REs belonging to the frequency domain resources of the second device can be understood as: the frequency domain resources of the second device include P REs, or the P REs are located in the frequency band of the second device, or the frequency band of the second device includes P RE.
  • REs other than P REs among the L REs do not send any signals can be understood as: the first device does not map any signals to REs other than P REs among the L REs, or the first device REs other than P REs among L REs are mapped to signals, but punctuation processing is performed on REs other than P REs among L REs.
  • REs other than P REs among the L REs may also be called blank REs.
  • P REs in the frequency domain resources of the second device are used to map the first reference signal, and the first device does not map any signal to REs other than the P REs in the frequency domain resources of the second device.
  • the method further includes: sending M*L sampling points corresponding to M time domain periods of the first reference signal to the second device within the first time domain symbol,
  • Each of the M time domain periods of the first reference signal corresponds to L sampling points, and the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal has Quasi-co-location relationship, the value of i is a partial positive integer from 1 to L, the first device is also used to send a first signal to the third device, and the M time domain periods of the first signal correspond to M* L sampling points, each of the M time domain periods of the first signal corresponds to L sampling points, and the other devices include the third device;
  • the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal is equal to the sequence of the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point is orthogonal;
  • M and L are positive integers.
  • M*L sampling points corresponding to M time domain periods of the first reference signal can be sent within the first time domain symbol.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal has a quasi-co-location relationship. That is to say, the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period has a The same spatial filtering parameters. In other words, the transmitting and receiving beams of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal are the same.
  • the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal is the same as the i-th sample among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the sequence of points is orthogonal. If only these sampling points are examined, the first reference signal sent by the first device to the second device and the first signal sent to the third device do not interfere with each other, so that there is no energy in the first reference signal measured by the second device. There will be energy of the first signal, so that the second device can measure the energy of the first reference signal more accurately and improve the accuracy of the training beam.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal has a quasi-co-location relationship, which can be: a part of the L sampling points in each time domain period has A set of quasi-co-located relationships. Another part of the L sampling points in each time domain cycle has a set of quasi-co-located relationships. Another part of the L sampling points in each time domain cycle has a set of quasi-co-located relationships. Address relationship, and so on, there can be a total of H groups of quasi-co-location relationships, H is a positive integer.
  • the time corresponding to the sampling points that do not have a quasi-co-location relationship among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period can be understood as the time required to switch the beam.
  • the time of the sampling point is the time required to switch the beam, for example, it may be the time required for the first device to switch the transmitting beam or the time required for the second device to switch the receiving beam.
  • the behavior of the first device in switching the sending beam and sending sampling points in each time domain period is the same.
  • the beam switching behavior of the first device when sending the first reference signal is periodic.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal has a quasi-co-location relationship, which can be understood as: the L samples corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal
  • the spatial filtering parameters of the i-th sampling point among the points are the same or the transmitting and receiving beams of the i-th sampling point corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal are the same or each time domain period of the first reference signal
  • the i-th sampling point among the corresponding L sampling points passes through the same transmission channel.
  • the i-th sampling point and the j-th sampling point have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the value of j is from 1 to L.
  • i and j are different. That is to say, multiple sampling points with a quasi-co-located relationship may include sampling points of the same period, or may also include sampling points of different periods.
  • the configuration information includes L bits. The L bits included in the configuration information correspond one-to-one to the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the value of each bit in the Q bits among the L bits included in the configuration information is the first value, indicating that the second device measures the first reference signal in each time domain period and the value of the bit.
  • Q bits correspond to Q sampling points one-to-one; among the L bits included in the configuration information, the value of each bit in the L-Q bits except the Q bits is the second value, indicating that the The second device does not measure the L-Q sampling points corresponding to the L-Q bits in each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the time corresponding to the L-Q sampling points corresponding to the L-Q bits in each time domain period in which the second device does not measure the first reference signal can be understood as the time when the first device switches the beam.
  • the first device can indicate to the second device through a bitmap which sampling points in each time domain period of the first reference signal are measured, and the second device determines the measurement behavior in each time domain period. All consistent.
  • the sampling points corresponding to these bits in each time domain cycle have a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the method further includes: receiving first measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol from the second device, where the first measurement information includes L bits.
  • the L bits included in the first measurement information correspond one to one to the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the value of the first bit among the L bits included in the first measurement information is the third value, indicating that the sampling point corresponding to the first bit in each time domain period of the first reference signal satisfies
  • the sum of energy of the sampling points in the quasi-co-located relationship is greater than the preset value
  • the value of the second bit among the L bits is the fourth value, indicating that in each time domain cycle of the first reference signal,
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points corresponding to the second bit satisfying the quasi-co-location relationship is less than or equal to the preset value, or it means that the second device does not measure the first reference signal in each time domain period.
  • the sampling point corresponding to the second bit and the time corresponding to the sampling point not measured are the time of switching the beam, so there is no need to measure.
  • the number Q of bits with the first value in the configuration information is greater than or equal to the number of bits with the third value in the first measurement information.
  • the sampling points corresponding to the first bit that satisfy a set of quasi-co-location relationships include sampling points in the same time domain period, and may also include sampling points in different time domain periods.
  • the second device needs to measure all sampling points that satisfy a set of quasi-co-location relationships to determine the energy sum of the sampling points to measure the beam.
  • a set of quasi-co-location relationships corresponds to the same pair of transceiver beams. Different groups of quasi-co-location relationships correspond to different pairs of transceiver beams.
  • the sampling points corresponding to the second bit that satisfy a set of quasi-co-location relationships may be in the same time domain period.
  • the sampling points can also be sampling points with different time domain periods.
  • the second device needs to measure all the sampling points that satisfy a set of quasi-co-location relationships to determine the energy sum of the sampling points to measure the beam.
  • the first measurement information may be information measured by the second device within the first time domain symbol, so the first device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the first measurement information from the second device, In this way, the first device can determine, according to the indication information, that the first measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the configuration information includes the Q indexes, and the Q indexes correspond to the Q sampling points one-to-one.
  • the second device determines Q sampling points according to Q indexes and measures the Q sampling points in each time domain period of the first reference signal, and the measurement behavior in each time domain period is consistent. .
  • the Q indexes may be numbers between 1 and L, or they may be numbers between 0 and L-1, or they may be other numbers, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method further includes: receiving second measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol from the second device, where the second measurement information indicates a target index, and the Q indexes Including the target index, the sum of energy of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship between the sampling points corresponding to the target index in each time domain period is greater than a preset value.
  • the target index may include one or more.
  • the second measurement information may directly indicate the target index or indirectly indicate the target index.
  • the second measurement information may be information measured by the second device within the first time domain symbol, so the first device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the second measurement information from the second device, In this way, the first device can determine, according to the indication information, that the second measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the method further includes: receiving third measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol from the second device, where the third measurement information includes each time period of the first reference signal. The sum of the energies of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship in the domain period.
  • the third measurement information may include the sum of H energies obtained from the sampling points of the H groups of quasi-co-located relationships, that is, one group of quasi-co-located relationships corresponds to one sum of energy.
  • the third measurement information may include the sum of F energies obtained from sampling points of F groups of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • a set of quasi-co-location relationships corresponds to a sum of energies.
  • the sum of F energies is the sum of energies greater than the preset value among the sums of H energies.
  • F is a positive integer less than or equal to H.
  • the second device can directly report the measured energy sum of the sampling points of each group of quasi-co-located relationships, or report the energy sum of the sampling points of F groups of quasi-co-located relationships whose energy sum is greater than the preset value.
  • the F bit positions in the third measurement information correspond one-to-one to the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships
  • the second device measures the F obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • the F bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry the sum of the F energies. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the F bit positions and the F group quasi-colocation relationship.
  • the first device After receiving the third measurement information, the first device determines the F sums of energies that correspond one-to-one with the F group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the F bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the F sums of energies, and sends The maximum energy sum of the group is The beam at the corresponding sampling point is the first target beam.
  • H bit positions in the third measurement information correspond to H sums of energies one-to-one, and the H bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry H sums of energies.
  • the first device determines the H sum of energies corresponding to the H group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the H bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the H sums of energies, and sends The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points in the embodiment of the present application may be the sum of the normalized energies of the sampling points.
  • the third measurement information may be information measured by the second device within the first time domain symbol, so the first device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the third measurement information from the second device, In this way, the first device can determine that the third measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the method further includes: sending first indication information to the second device, the first indication information being used to indicate the first reference sent within the first time domain symbol.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each of the M time domain periods of the signal has a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the first device may send the first indication information to the second device through DCI or MAC CE or radio resource control RRC signaling.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information to the second device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the second indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the frame index of the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, the time slot index of the time slot in the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, and the time slot index in the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located.
  • the second indication information is specifically used to indicate the time slot offset of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located relative to the time slot in which the first device sends the second indication information and the time slot in the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. Symbol index.
  • the second indication information may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the first device may use downlink control information (DCI) or medium access control (medium access control, MAC) control element (control element, CE) or wireless resources.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • MAC medium access control
  • CE control element
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • third indication information is sent, where the third indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate the frame index of the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, the time slot index of the time slot in the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, and the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. Symbol index within.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate the time slot offset of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located relative to the time slot in which the first device sends the third indication information and the time slot in the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. Symbol index.
  • the sending the third indication information includes: sending the third indication information to the third device, or broadcasting the third indication information.
  • the third device sends the third indication information, including: the network device may send the third indication information to the second terminal device through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • sending the third instruction information to the third device includes: the third terminal device can use SCI 2 or MAC CE or RRC signaling. The third instruction information is sent to the fourth terminal device.
  • broadcasting the third indication information includes: the third terminal device can pass SCI 2 or MAC CE in the broadcast message or RRC signaling broadcasts third indication information.
  • the method further includes: sending fourth indication information, the fourth indication information being used to indicate the first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth offset corresponding to the L resource elements. value, and the first comb tooth offset value ranges from 0 to M-1.
  • sending the fourth indication information includes: sending the fourth indication information to the third device, or broadcasting the fourth indication information.
  • sending fourth indication information to the third device includes: the network device can use DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling Send fourth instruction information to the second terminal device.
  • the third terminal device may send the fourth indication information to the fourth terminal device through SCI 2 or MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • broadcasting the fourth indication information includes: the third terminal device can pass SCI 2 or MAC CE in the broadcast message or RRC signaling broadcasts fourth indication information.
  • the method further includes: sending fifth indication information to the third device, the fifth indication information being used to indicate one of the L resource elements except the P resource elements. No signal is mapped on resource elements other than the resource elements, or holes are punched on resource elements other than the P resource elements among the L resource elements.
  • the method further includes: receiving sixth indication information broadcast by a fourth device, the sixth indication information indicating the first time domain symbol; receiving seventh indication information broadcast by the fourth device , the seventh indication information is used to instruct the fourth device to send the second comb tooth value K and the second comb tooth offset value, K, corresponding to the resource element of the second reference signal in the first time domain symbol.
  • the sixth indication information is used to instruct the fourth device to send the second comb tooth value K and the second comb tooth offset value, K, corresponding to the resource element of the second reference signal in the first time domain symbol.
  • the method further includes: based on the first time domain symbol indicated by the sixth indication information and the second comb tooth value K indicated by the seventh indication information and the The second comb tooth offset value determines W resource elements.
  • the W resource elements span the frequency domain resources of the at least two devices. Any two resource elements among the W resource elements are separated by an integer multiple of K. Resource elements, W is a positive integer; wherein, determining P resource elements among L resource elements includes: filtering out resource elements belonging to the W resource elements from the frequency domain resources of the first device, Determine P resource elements among the L resource elements.
  • the method further includes: based on the first time domain symbol indicated by the sixth indication information and the second comb tooth value K indicated by the seventh indication information and the The second comb tooth offset value determines W resource elements.
  • the W resource elements span the frequency domain resources of the at least two devices. Any two resource elements among the W resource elements are separated by an integer multiple of K. Resource element, W is a positive integer; filter out resource elements belonging to the W resource elements from the frequency domain resources of the first device, and determine the resource elements for the first device to send other signals.
  • a method for processing a signal including: the method is applicable to a second device, including: receiving M* corresponding to M time domain periods from the second signal on a first time domain symbol.
  • L sampling points, each of the M time domain periods of the second signal corresponds to L sampling points; according to the inner product of the first sequence and the second sequence, the first sequence of the second signal is determined.
  • the energy of the reference signal, the first sequence includes a sequence consisting of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal, the second sequence includes the local first reference A sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points in each of the M time domain periods of the signal;
  • M and L are positive integers, and the value of i is a partial positive integer from 1 to L.
  • the second device in the process of determining the energy of the first reference signal in the second signal, can learn the first reference signal sent by the first device. That is to say, the second device locally saves The first reference signal. After receiving the second signal, the second device uses a sequence composed of the i-th sampling point of each time domain cycle of the second signal and the locally saved i-th sampling point of each time domain cycle of the first reference signal. During the inner product process of a sequence composed of i sampling points, the interference of other signals (signals mapped on resource elements other than L resource elements corresponding to the first time domain symbol) to the first reference signal can be eliminated, so that Therefore, the energy of the first reference signal determined by the second device is relatively accurate.
  • the second signal includes a first reference signal sent to the second device and a first signal sent to the third device.
  • the second signal consists of the first reference signal sent to the second device and the first signal sent to the third device.
  • the second device can not only receive the first reference signal sent to the second device but also receive the first signal sent to the third device. From the perspective of the second device, it is said that the second device receives the second signal on the first time domain symbol. However, the second device does not perceive that the received second signal is a combination of the first reference signal and the first signal.
  • the second device performs an inner product process using a sequence composed of the ith sampling point of each time domain cycle of the second signal and a sequence consisting of the ith sampling point of each time domain cycle of the locally saved first reference signal. , the interference of the first signal to the first reference signal can be eliminated, so that the energy of the first reference signal determined by the second device can be more accurate.
  • the second device uses a fixed beam to receive M*L sampling points corresponding to M time domain periods of the second signal within the first time domain symbol. That is to say, when measuring the transmit beam of the first device, During the process, the second device uses a fixed beam to receive sampling points. In this way, the measured transmission beam of the first device can be made more accurate, and the measurement inaccuracy caused by the second device changing the beam for reception can be avoided.
  • the first sequence also includes a sequence composed of the j-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal
  • the second sequence further includes A sequence consisting of the j-th sampling point among the L sampling points in each of the M time domain periods of the local first reference signal, where the value of j is a partial positive integer from 1 to L, i is not equal to j.
  • the method further includes: receiving configuration information from the first device, the configuration information being used to instruct the second device to measure the corresponding time domain period of each time domain period in the second signal.
  • Q sampling points among the L sampling points, the Q sampling points include the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal.
  • the configuration information includes L bits, and the L bits included in the configuration information correspond one-to-one to L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal.
  • the value of each bit among the Q bits among the L bits included in the configuration information is the first value, indicating that the second device measures the second signal in each time domain period and is consistent with the Q bit.
  • Q sampling points corresponding to one bit; the value of each bit in the LQ bits except the Q bits among the L bits is the second value, indicating that the second device does not measure LQ sampling points corresponding to the LQ bits in each time domain period of the second signal.
  • the time corresponding to the L-Q sampling points that correspond one-to-one to the L-Q bits in each time domain period of the second signal when the second device does not measure it can be understood as the time when the first device switches the beam.
  • the second device can determine how many groups of quasi-co-located relationships there are based on the Q bits, and then calculate the sum of energy of the sampling points of each group of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol to the first device, where the first measurement information includes L bits, and the L bits included in the first measurement information are consistent with the The L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period are in one-to-one correspondence.
  • the value of the first bit among the L bits included in the first measurement information is the third value, indicating that the first reference signal in the second signal is different from the first bit in each time domain cycle.
  • the sum of energies of the corresponding sampling points satisfying the quasi-co-location relationship is greater than the preset value; the value of the second bit among the L bits is the fourth value, indicating the first value in the second signal.
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points corresponding to the second bit in each time domain period of the reference signal is less than or equal to the preset value, or it indicates that the second device did not measure the first reference signal in the second signal.
  • the first measurement information may be information measured by the second device within the first time domain symbol, so the second device may send indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the first measurement information to the first device, In this way, the first device can determine, according to the indication information, that the first measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship between the sampling points corresponding to the first bit is a part of the energy of the first reference signal
  • the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship between the sampling points corresponding to the second bit The sum of the energies is part of the energy of the first reference signal.
  • the configuration information includes the Q indexes, and the Q indexes correspond to the Q sampling points one-to-one.
  • the Q indexes may be numbers between 1 and L, or they may be numbers between 0 and L-1, or they may be other numbers, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second device can determine how many groups of quasi-co-located relationships there are based on the Q indexes, and then calculate the sum of energy of the sampling points of each group of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • the method further includes: The device sends second measurement information.
  • the second measurement information indicates a target index, and the Q indexes include the target index.
  • the sum of energies of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-located relationship between the sampling points corresponding to the target index is greater than a preset value.
  • the second measurement information may be information measured by the second device within the first time domain symbol, so the second device may send indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the second measurement information to the first device, In this way, the first device can determine, according to the indication information, that the second measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal. Number.
  • the method further includes: sending third measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol to the first device, where the third measurement information satisfies the first requirement in the second signal.
  • the third measurement information may include the sum of H energies obtained from the sampling points of the H groups of quasi-co-located relationships, that is, one group of quasi-co-located relationships corresponds to one sum of energy.
  • the third measurement signal may include the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of F groups of quasi-co-located relationships, where one group of quasi-co-located relationships corresponds to one energy sum, F The sum of energies is the sum of energies greater than the preset value among the sums of H energies, and F is a positive integer less than or equal to H.
  • the second device can directly report the measured energy sum of the sampling points of each group of quasi-co-located relationships or report the energy sum of F groups of sampling points of the quasi-co-located relationship whose energy sum is greater than the preset value.
  • the F bit positions in the third measurement information correspond one-to-one to the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships
  • the second device measures the F obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • the F bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry the sum of the F energies. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the F bit positions and the F group quasi-colocation relationship.
  • the first device After receiving the third measurement information, the first device determines the F sums of energies that correspond one-to-one with the F group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the F bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the F sums of energies, and sends The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • H bit positions in the third measurement information correspond to H sums of energies one-to-one, and the H bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry H sums of energies.
  • the first device determines the H sum of energies corresponding to the H group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the H bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the H sums of energies, and sends The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points in the embodiment of the present application may be the sum of the normalized energies of the sampling points.
  • the second device may determine which sampling points have a group of quasi-co-located relationships, and the second device uses the received first sequence composed of sampling points that have a group of quasi-co-located relationships to have a quasi-co-located relationship with the group.
  • the inner product of the local second sequence corresponding to the sampling point is divided by the local second sequence to determine the normalized energy sum of the group of sampling points with a quasi-co-located relationship.
  • the method further includes: receiving first indication information from the first device, the first indication information being used to instruct a third signal in the second signal to be sent within the first time domain symbol.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each of the M time domain periods of a reference signal has a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the first device, the second indication information being used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • a method for demodulating a signal is provided, and the method is applicable to a third device, including:
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth offset value corresponding to the L resource elements.
  • the first comb tooth offset value is The value range is 0 to M-1, and the L resource elements are frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time domain symbol;
  • L-P resource elements belonging to the frequency domain resources of the third device are determined according to the first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth offset value indicated by the fourth indication information, and the L-P resource elements are No signals are sent on;
  • receiving the fourth indication information includes: receiving the fourth indication information from the first device.
  • receiving the fourth indication information from the first device includes: the fourth terminal device receives the fourth indication information broadcast by the third terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • Receive third indication information the third indication information being used to indicate the first time domain symbol
  • the demodulating the first signal according to the L-P resources includes:
  • the first signal is demodulated according to the L-P resources in the first time domain symbol indicated by the third indication information.
  • receiving the third indication information includes: receiving the third indication information from the first device.
  • receiving the third indication information from the first device includes: the fourth terminal device receives the third indication information broadcast by the third terminal device.
  • the method further includes: receiving fifth indication information, the fifth indication information being used to indicate that no signal is mapped on the L-P resource elements or that a signal is mapped on the L-P resource elements. hole;
  • demodulating the first signal according to the L-P resources in the first time domain symbol indicated by the third indication information includes:
  • the first signal is demodulated according to not mapping a signal on the L-P resource elements in the first time domain symbol or puncturing on the L-P resource elements.
  • a method for processing a signal is provided.
  • the method is applicable to a first device and includes: sending M corresponding to M time domain periods of the first reference signal to the second device within the first time domain symbol. *L sampling points.
  • each of the M time domain periods of the first reference signal corresponds to L sampling points
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal has Quasi-co-location relationship
  • the value of i is a partial positive integer from 1 to L.
  • the first device is also configured to send a first signal to a third device.
  • the M time domain periods of the first signal correspond to M*L sampling points.
  • Each of the M time domain periods of the first signal The time domain period corresponds to L sampling points;
  • the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal is equal to the sequence of the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point is orthogonal; where M and L are positive integers.
  • the i-th sampling point and the j-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the value of j is Some positive integers from 1 to L, i is not equal to j.
  • the method further includes:
  • Q is a positive integer less than or equal to L.
  • the configuration information includes L bits, and the L bits included in the configuration information correspond to L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal, so The value of each bit in the Q bits among the L bits included in the configuration information is the first value, indicating that the second device measures the same value as the Q bit in each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • Q sampling points corresponding to one bit; the value of each bit in the LQ bits except the Q bits among the L bits included in the configuration information is the second value, indicating that the first The second device does not measure the LQ sampling points corresponding to the LQ bits in each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the method further includes: receiving first measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol from the second device, where the first measurement information includes L bits, and the first The L bits included in the measurement information correspond one-to-one to the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain cycle of the first reference signal.
  • the value of the first bit among the L bits included in the first measurement information is:
  • the third value indicates that the sum of the energies of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship with the sampling point corresponding to the first bit in each time domain period of the first reference signal is greater than the preset value;
  • the value of the second bit in the bit is the fourth value, which represents the energy of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship with the sampling point corresponding to the second bit in each time domain cycle of the first reference signal.
  • the sum is less than or equal to the preset value, or indicates that the second device did not measure the sampling point corresponding to the second bit in each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the configuration information includes the Q indexes, and the Q indexes correspond to the Q sampling points one-to-one.
  • the method further includes: receiving second measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol from the second device, where the second measurement information indicates a target index, and the Q indexes Including the target index, the sum of energy of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship between the sampling points corresponding to the target index in each time domain period is greater than a preset value.
  • the method further includes: receiving third measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol from the second device, where the third measurement information includes each time period of the first reference signal. The sum of the energies of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship in the domain period.
  • the method further includes: sending first indication information to the second device, the first indication information being used to indicate the first reference sent within the first time domain symbol.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each of the M time domain periods of the signal has a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information to the second device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the other device is a third device, and the method further includes:
  • the present application provides a communication device, which has the function of realizing the behavior of each device in the above aspects and possible implementation modes of the above aspects.
  • Functions can be implemented by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • Hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions. For example, determine the module or unit, transceiver module or unit, etc.
  • the application provides an electronic device.
  • the device includes a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the above-mentioned Methods in aspects and possible implementations of the above aspects are executed.
  • the processor is used to execute computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the device performs the methods in the above aspects and possible implementations of the above aspects.
  • the device includes one or more processors.
  • the device may also include a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the device may include one or more memories.
  • the memory can be integrated with the processor or provided separately.
  • the device may also include a transceiver.
  • the present application provides an electronic device, including: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more computer programs. Wherein, one or more computer programs are stored in the memory, and the one or more computer programs include instructions. When the instructions are executed by the electronic device, one or more processors are caused to execute the above aspects or the method in any possible implementation of the aspects, or the method introduced in any embodiment of this application.
  • the electronic device may also include: a touch display screen and/or a camera, where the touch display screen includes a touch-sensitive surface and a display.
  • the application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions When the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device causes the electronic device to perform the above aspects or any possible method of each aspect, or the present invention. Apply the methods described in any of the examples.
  • this application provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product When the computer program product is run on an electronic device, it causes the electronic device to execute the above aspects or any possible method of each aspect, or any embodiment of the application. The method presented.
  • the present application provides a device, including a unit for executing the method introduced in any embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of mapping resource elements provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of time domain sampling points provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of beam transmission sampling points provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of a signal processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of another mapping resource element provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another signal processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of another beam transmission sampling point provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another signal processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of another mapping resource element provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of another time domain sampling point provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of another signal processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of another mapping resource element provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 14 is a schematic diagram of yet another signal processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 15 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • GPRS General packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS Universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX global interoperability for microwave access
  • Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario applied to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the system includes: a terminal device 110 and a network device 120.
  • Terminal equipment 110 is also called user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, Remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user communication device, etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • access terminal user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, Remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user communication device, etc.
  • the terminal device 110 may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to a user, such as a handheld device, a vehicle-mounted device, etc. with wireless connection capabilities.
  • terminal devices include: mobile phones, tablets, laptops, PDAs, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, augmented reality devices Augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, smart grid Wireless terminals in transportation safety (transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart city (smart city), wireless terminals in smart home (smart home), cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocols protocol (SIP) telephones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants, PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communications capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems,
  • This application is not limited to vehicle-mounted equipment, wearable equipment, drones, terminal equipment in the 5G network or terminal equipment in the future evolved public land mobile communication network (
  • the network device 120 may also be called a radio access network (RAN) or a wireless access network device.
  • the network device 120 may be a transmission reception point (TRP) or an evolution in the LTE system.
  • a base station evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB
  • a home base station for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB
  • a base band unit base band unit, BBU
  • a cloud wireless access network e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB.
  • a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a drone, a satellite, a network device in a 5G network, or a network device that will evolve in the future.
  • the network equipment in the PLMN network can also be the access point (AP) in the wireless local area network (WLAN), or the gNB in the NR system.
  • the above network equipment 120 can also be a city Base station, micro base station, pico base station, femto base station, etc. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device 120 may include a centralized unit (CU) node, a distributed unit (DU) node, or a radio access network including a CU node and a DU node.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • RAN radio access network
  • CU-CP node control plane CU node
  • CU-UP node user plane CU node
  • DU node DU node
  • Figure 1 is only for ease of understanding and schematically shows the terminal device 110 and the network device 120, but this should not constitute any limitation on the present application.
  • the wireless communication system may also include a greater number of network devices, as well. Can be packaged Including a larger or smaller number of terminal devices, this application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device 110 may be fixed-positioned or movable.
  • the network device 120 in Figure 1 can also be replaced by a terminal device, and the link for transmitting data between the terminal devices is called a sidelink.
  • Side links are generally used for direct communication scenarios such as vehicle to everything (V2X) or device to device (D2D) in indoor commercial scenarios.
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • D2D device to device
  • multiple terminal devices in indoor commercial scenarios also need direct communication.
  • a mobile phone needs to transmit VR video to VR glasses; a mobile phone needs to project the played screen onto a smart screen, etc.
  • V2X is a key technology for realizing smart cars, autonomous driving, and intelligent transportation systems.
  • V2X can include vehicle-to-network (V2N), vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) communications wait.
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2I vehicle-to-infra
  • terminal device 110 can be simplified to “terminal device”
  • network device 120 can be simplified to “network device”.
  • Figure 1 may include more terminal devices.
  • Figure 1 when Figure 1 includes more terminal devices, Figure 1 may not include the network device 120, that is, communication between multiple terminal devices may not require the assistance of the network device.
  • Figure 1 when Figure 1 includes more terminal devices, Figure 1 may also include network devices, and communication between multiple terminal devices may require the assistance of the network device.
  • the beam can be called a spatial domain filter, or a spatial filter, a spatial parameter, or a spatial filter parameter.
  • the beam used to send signals can be called a transmission beam (transmission beam, Tx beam), a spatial domain transmission filter (spatial domain transmission filter) or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial transmission parameter);
  • the beam used to receive signals can be called a It is the reception beam (reception beam, Rx beam), which can be called the spatial domain receive filter (spatial domain receive filter) or spatial receive parameter (spatial RX parameter).
  • the beam used for transmitting signals and the beam used for receiving signals may be the same beam or different beams.
  • the transmitting beam may refer to the distribution of signal strength in different directions in space after the signal is emitted by the antenna
  • the receiving beam may refer to the signal strength distribution of the wireless signal received from the antenna in different directions in space.
  • the beam may be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
  • the beam forming technology may be beam forming technology or other technologies.
  • the beamforming technology can be digital beamforming technology, analog beamforming technology, or hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology.
  • One beam may include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels and reference signals (such as S-SSB, CSI-RS, DMRS), etc.
  • One or more antenna ports forming a beam can also be viewed as a set of antenna ports.
  • one beam corresponds to an index of a beam, so a beam can be uniquely identified by the index of the beam.
  • a quasi-co-location relationship between sampling points means that the spatial filtering parameters of the sampling points are the same or the spatial filters are the same or the spatial filters are the same or the spatial parameters are the same or the transmitting and receiving beams of the sampling points are the same.
  • two sampling points have a quasi-co-location relationship, which means that the spatial filtering parameters of the two sampling points are the same or the spatial filters are the same or the spatial filters are the same or the spatial parameters are the same or the transmitting and receiving beams of the sampling points are the same.
  • the existing technology uses the comb-like characteristics of the reference signal to train multiple beams within one time domain symbol, thereby reducing the time domain overhead.
  • the device receiving the reference signal should not receive other signals except the reference signal used for beam training on other resource elements (REs) of the same time domain symbol.
  • REs resource elements
  • the RE in Figure 2 is an RE corresponding to a time domain symbol. It is assumed that the network device sends the reference signal on the RE shown in Figure 2, and the terminal device receives the reference signal on the corresponding RE.
  • the comb structure of the reference signal is specifically expressed as follows: one RE in every M RE is used to send the reference signal, and the reference signal is used to measure the beam.
  • the terminal equipment In order to maintain the comb structure of the reference signal in the frequency domain, the terminal equipment should not receive signals on other REs of the time domain symbol, and the network equipment needs to use different beams on other REs of the time domain symbol than those used to transmit the reference signal. Either the relevant beam sends a signal, or no signal is sent on other REs to avoid interference with beam measurements.
  • the reference signal shown in Figure 2 is converted to the time domain, as shown in Figure 3.
  • the converted time domain sampling points have time domain periodicity within one time domain symbol. Therefore, the terminal equipment can measure different beams in multiple time domain periods, thereby achieving beam training within time domain symbols.
  • the network device can send L sampling points through one beam in one of the M time domain cycles.
  • the beams in different time domain cycles are different.
  • the fill patterns of different beams in Figure 4 are different.
  • the filling patterns of the sampling points sent by different beams are different, and the filling patterns of the sampling points sent by the same beam are the same.
  • the terminal device can measure the sum of the energy of L sampling points within a certain time domain period, thereby achieving the measurement of the beam.
  • the above-mentioned existing technologies may limit the flexibility of resource scheduling.
  • the network equipment needs to use beams that are not related to the beam that sends the reference signal to send signals on other REs of the time domain symbol, or do not send signals on other REs, so as to avoid causing interference to beam measurements.
  • the terminal direct communication scenario without network device scheduling Since there is no central scheduling node in this scenario, there is no guarantee that the beams used on other REs are irrelevant to the beams used to send the reference signals, or that they are not sent on other REs. signal, thus causing serious interference to beam training.
  • this application designs blank REs and constructs local orthogonality to eliminate interference on other REs. We will introduce the embodiments in this application in detail below.
  • the first device may map the first reference signal to be sent to the second device on P resource elements among the L resource elements corresponding to the first time domain symbol.
  • the LP resource elements except the P resource elements do not send any signals.
  • any two resource elements among the L resource elements corresponding to the first time domain symbol are separated by an integer multiple of M resource elements.
  • the L resource elements span the frequency domain resources of at least two devices, the P resource elements belong to the frequency domain resources of the second device, and the LP resource elements belong to the frequency domain resources of other devices.
  • the second device will measure different sampling points of the first reference signal on the first time domain symbol to measure different beams, thereby performing intra-symbol beam training and reducing resource overhead.
  • all resource elements in the frequency domain resources of other devices except the LP resource elements that do not send any signals can be used to transmit data, and There are no restrictions on the beams used to transmit data. This can improve the flexibility of resource scheduling.
  • method 500 for processing signals in the embodiment of the present application is described below with reference to Figure 5.
  • the above-mentioned first device may be a network device in the method 500
  • the second device may be the first terminal device in the method 500
  • other devices may be Other terminal devices in method 500.
  • method 500 includes:
  • the network device determines P REs among L resource elements (REs). Any two REs among the L REs are separated by an integer multiple of M REs.
  • the L REs are frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time domain symbol.
  • the L REs span the frequency domain resources of at least two devices.
  • the P REs belong to the frequency domain resources of the first terminal equipment. Among them, M, L and P are positive integers, and L is greater than or equal to P.
  • the first time domain symbol may be a first OFDM symbol.
  • L REs are frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time domain symbol, which can be understood as: L REs belong to the frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time domain symbol, or the frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time domain symbol include L RE.
  • L REs spanning the frequency domain resources of at least two devices can be understood as: L REs belong to the frequency domain resources of at least two devices, or L REs are located in the frequency bands of at least two devices, or at least two
  • the total frequency domain resources of the device include L REs. It should be understood that in the process of allocating resources to each terminal device, the network device will allocate different frequency bands of a bandwidth part (BWP) to different terminal devices. The total frequency domain resources of different terminal devices can occupy one BWP. .
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • the P REs belonging to the frequency domain resources of the first terminal device can be understood as: the frequency domain resources of the first terminal device include P REs, or the P REs are located in the frequency band of the first terminal device, or the first terminal device The frequency band includes P REs.
  • the first time domain symbol may correspond to M*L REs.
  • L can be understood as the number of frequency domain rasters on the frequency domain resource corresponding to the first time domain symbol, and one frequency domain raster includes M REs.
  • One RE among the M REs in each of the L frequency domain rasters constitutes L REs, and the L REs correspond to the L frequency domain rasters one-to-one.
  • a frequency domain raster can be a resource block (RB).
  • RB resource block
  • any two REs among L REs are separated by M REs, or 2M REs, or 3M REs, etc.
  • M may also be called a first comb tooth value, and the first comb tooth value is equal to the number of REs included in a frequency domain raster.
  • Each of the L REs belongs to a frequency domain grid, and the first comb tooth offset value of each of the L REs in the respective frequency domain grids is the same.
  • the L REs are RE 1, RE 2...RE L, and the comb offset value of each of the L REs in their respective frequency domain rasters is 1.
  • the network device maps the first reference signal to be sent to the first terminal device on P REs, where among the L REs, REs other than the P REs belong to frequency domain resources of other terminal devices and do not send any Signal.
  • the at least two devices include a first terminal device and other terminal devices.
  • REs other than P REs among the L REs do not send any signals, which can be understood as: the network device does not map any signals to REs other than the P REs among the L REs, or the network device does not map any signals among the L REs.
  • REs other than P REs among the REs are mapped to signals, but punctuation processing is performed on REs other than P REs among the L REs.
  • REs other than P REs among the L REs may also be called blank REs.
  • any two REs among the P REs are separated by a positive integer multiple of M REs, for example, M REs are separated, or 2M REs are separated, or 3M REs are separated, etc.
  • the first reference signal mapped by the network device has a comb structure, and REs other than P REs among the L REs do not send any signal.
  • the frequency domain information of the first terminal device The P REs in the source are used to map the first reference signal, and the REs other than the P REs in the frequency domain resource of the first terminal device do not map any signal.
  • the network device determines that the L REs in the first time domain symbol are RE 1, RE 2, RE 3...RE L.
  • RE 1 belongs to the first frequency domain raster
  • RE 2 belongs to the second frequency domain raster
  • RE 3 belongs to the third frequency domain raster
  • RE L belongs to the Lth frequency domain raster
  • RE 1 and RE 2 M REs are spaced between them
  • M REs are spaced between RE 2 and RE 3
  • 2M REs are spaced between RE 1 and RE 3, and so on.
  • the network device allocates the first frequency domain raster and the L-th frequency domain raster to the second terminal device, that is, the first frequency domain raster and the L-th frequency domain raster belong to the frequency domain of the second terminal device. Domain resources or frequency bands located in the second terminal device.
  • the network device allocates the second frequency domain raster and the third frequency domain raster to the first terminal device, that is, the second frequency domain raster and the third frequency domain raster belong to the frequency domain resources of the first terminal device. Or located in the frequency band of the first terminal device.
  • the P REs of the first terminal device determined by the network device include RE 2 and RE 3 in Figure 6. RE 2 and RE 3 are used to map the first signal to be sent to the first terminal device.
  • REs other than RE 2 and RE 3 in the second frequency domain raster and the third frequency domain raster of the first terminal device do not map any signals.
  • RE 1 and RE L are used to not send any signal.
  • the network device can use REs other than RE 1 in the first frequency domain raster, and REs other than RE L in the Lth frequency domain raster to send signals to the second terminal.
  • the device sends the first signal without any restrictions on the transmitted beam, which can improve resource utilization.
  • the method for processing signals is provided.
  • the network device can map the first reference signal to be sent to the first terminal device on P REs, and on the REs other than the P REs among the L REs. No signal is sent.
  • the first reference signal sent by the network device has a comb structure, and the first terminal device can measure different sampling points of the first reference signal in the time domain to measure different beams, thereby training within one time domain symbol. Multiple beams reduce resource overhead.
  • the network device can use resource elements other than L-P REs in the frequency domain resources of the second terminal device to send the first signal to the second terminal device, and the network device does not need to use the same method as sending the first reference signal to the first terminal device.
  • the first signal is sent to the second terminal device by an incoherent beam.
  • the network device sets the blank RE in the frequency domain resource of the second terminal device, and can use the RE on the frequency domain resource of the second terminal device except the blank RE to send the first terminal device to the first terminal device.
  • the first signal is transmitted using a coherent beam or an incoherent beam of the reference signal, thereby improving the flexibility of resource scheduling.
  • the network device maps the first reference signal to be sent to the first terminal device in the frequency domain according to the above method 500, the network device will send the time domain sampling point corresponding to the first reference signal in the time domain.
  • the following is combined with the method of Figure 7 700 describes the process in which the network device sends the sampling point corresponding to the first reference signal, and the first terminal device measures the sampling point corresponding to the first reference signal. As shown in Figure 7, method 700 includes:
  • the network device sends M*L sampling points corresponding to the M time domain periods of the first reference signal to the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol.
  • Each time domain in the M time domain periods of the first reference signal A period corresponds to L sampling points, and the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period has a quasi-colocation relationship, and the value of i is a partial positive integer from 1 to L.
  • the first reference signal in method 700 may be called a time domain sampling point of the reference signal.
  • the time domain period in the embodiment of this application can be replaced by the sampling period.
  • the first terminal device does not measure sampling points corresponding to positive integers where i does not take a value from 1 to L, where the time corresponding to these sampling points that the first terminal device does not measure is the time when the network device switches beams.
  • M in method 700 is M in method 500
  • L in method 700 is L in method 500.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal has a quasi-co-location relationship, which can be understood as: the L samples corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal
  • the spatial filtering parameters of the i-th sampling point among the points are the same, or the transmitting and receiving beams of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal are the same, or each time domain period of the first reference signal
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to the domain period passes through the same transmission channel. As shown in Figure 8, there are a total of M time domain cycles in Figure 8, and each time domain cycle has L sampling points.
  • the network device uses the same beam to transmit the corresponding sampling points in each time domain cycle. For example, the network device uses beam 1 to send the 1st and 2nd sampling points in each time domain cycle, and the network device uses beam 2 to send the 5th and 6th sampling points in each time domain cycle. Point, the value of i in Figure 8 can be 1, 2, 5, 6.
  • the time corresponding to the third sampling point and the fourth sampling point in each time domain cycle is the time required for the network device to switch from beam 1 to beam 2.
  • this embodiment of the present application does not place any limit on the number of beams to be trained on the network device.
  • the number of beams to be trained on the network device may be more than L, less than L, or equal to L.
  • the network device may use one beam to send multiple sampling points. For example, as shown in Figure 8, the network device uses beam 1 to send the 1st and 2nd sampling points in each time domain cycle, and the network device uses beam 2 to send the 5th sample in each time domain cycle. point and the 6th sampling point.
  • beam 1 sends two sampling points in each time domain cycle, and a total of 2M sampling points are sent;
  • beam 2 sends two sampling points in each time domain cycle, and a total of 2M sampling points are sent.
  • the network device can send M*L sampling points corresponding to M time domain periods through no more than L beams in the first time domain symbol, Then, in the second time domain symbol, M*L sampling points corresponding to M time domain periods are transmitted through the remaining beams.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal has a quasi-co-location relationship, which may include: L samples corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the i-th sampling point and the j-th sampling point in the points have a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the value of j is a positive integer from 1 to L.
  • i and j are different. That is to say, the sampling points in each time domain period of the first reference signal also have a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • Multiple sampling points with a quasi-co-located relationship can belong to the same time domain cycle, or they can belong to different time domain cycles, or they can partially belong to one time domain cycle and partially belong to different time domain cycles.
  • the first sampling point and the second sampling point of the same time domain cycle in the time domain cycle have a set of quasi-co-location relationships, and the first sampling point and the second sampling point of different time domain cycles in M time domain cycles have a quasi-colocation relationship.
  • Points also have this group of quasi-co-located relationships, so a total of 2M sampling points have quasi-co-located relationships.
  • the spatial filtering parameters of the 2M sampling points are the same or the transmitting and receiving beams of the 2M sampling points are the same or the 2M sampling points pass through the same transmission channel.
  • the sampling points have a quasi-co-location relationship, that is to say, the spatial filtering parameters of the 2M sampling points are the same or the transmitting and receiving beams of the 2M sampling points are the same or the 2M sampling points pass through the same transmission channel.
  • method 700 further includes: the network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the second indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the second indication information is specifically used to indicate the frame index of the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, the time slot index of the time slot in the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, and the time slot index in the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located.
  • Symbol index is specifically used to indicate the time slot offset of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located relative to the time slot in which the network device sends the second indication information and the symbol index of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located.
  • the network device sets the signal to the first terminal before the first time domain symbol. The device sends the second instruction information.
  • the second indication information may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not place any limitation on the manner of indicating the first time domain symbol.
  • the network device may configure time domain resources for the training transmission beam and time domain resources for the first terminal device reception beam. If the first time domain symbol indicated by the second indication information is the time domain resource for configuring the training transmission beam, then The first terminal device determines that the network device needs to train a transmission beam. If the first time domain symbol indicated by the second indication information is the time domain resource for configuring the training receiving beam, the first terminal device determines that the network device needs to train the receiving beam of the first terminal device.
  • the network device can use downlink control information (DCI) or medium access control (medium access control, MAC) control element (control element, CE) or radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) information.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • MAC medium access control
  • CE control element
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • method 700 also includes: the network device sends configuration information to the first terminal device, the configuration information is used to instruct the first terminal device to measure Q of the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • Sampling point, Q is a positive integer less than or equal to L. It should be understood that at this time, the network device switches the transmission beam to send the sampling point corresponding to the first reference signal, and the first terminal device uses a fixed beam to receive the sampling point. Therefore, the network device will send the configuration information to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device measures the energy of the sampling point based on the configuration information, thereby achieving measurement of the beam.
  • the first terminal device also reports the measurement information to the network device, and the network device can determine the first target beam in the transmission beam based on the measurement information.
  • Configuration information and measurement information are described in detail below.
  • the network device may send the configuration information to the first terminal device through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • the behavior of the network device in sending the sampling points corresponding to the first reference signal is periodic, that is, the behavior of the network device in sending the sampling points corresponding to the first reference signal is the same in each time domain period.
  • the network device uses beam 1 to send the 1st sampling point and the 2nd sampling point in each time domain period, and the network device uses beam 2 to send the 5th sampling point and the 5th sampling point in each time domain period. 6 sampling points.
  • the configuration information is described below in two situations.
  • the configuration information includes L bits, and the L bits included in the configuration information correspond to L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the value of each bit among the Q bits among the L bits is the first value, which represents the Q sampling points corresponding to the Q bits in each time domain period in which the first terminal device measures the first reference signal.
  • the value of each of the LQ bits except the Q bits among the L bits is the second value, indicating that the first terminal device does not measure the same value as the LQ bits of the first reference signal in each time domain cycle.
  • the first terminal device may measure Q sampling points that correspond to Q bits in each time domain period, but does not measure LQ sampling points that correspond to LQ sampling points in each time domain period.
  • the values of several consecutive bits among the Q bits are the first values, indicating that the sampling points corresponding to these bits in each time domain cycle have a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the first value is 1
  • the second value is 0, a total of Q bits among L bits have a value of 1
  • the remaining LQ bits have a value of 0, and several consecutive bits among the Q bits have a value of 0.
  • a value of 1 indicates that the sampling points corresponding to these bits in each time domain cycle have a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the L bits included in the configuration information are 11001100. At this time, L is 8.
  • the first terminal device measures the first sampling point and the second sample in each of the M time domain cycles.
  • the 1st and 2nd sampling points in each time domain cycle have a set of quasi-co-located relationships, and the 5th and 6th sampling points in each time-domain cycle have another set of quasi-colocated locations.
  • the time corresponding to the 3rd sampling point, 4th sampling point, 7th sampling point and 8th sampling point in each time domain cycle is the network The time required for network equipment to switch beams.
  • the network device can indicate to the first terminal device through a bitmap which sampling points in each time domain period of measuring the first reference signal are not measured, and the first The measurement behavior of the terminal device is consistent for each time domain period.
  • the network device may receive the first measurement information from the first terminal device.
  • the first measurement information includes L bits, and the L bits included in the first measurement information correspond one to one to the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the value of the first bit among the L bits is the third value, which represents the energy of the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship with the sampling point corresponding to the first bit in each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the sum is greater than the preset value; the value of the second bit among the L bits is the fourth value, indicating that the sampling point corresponding to the second bit in each time domain cycle of the first reference signal satisfies the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the sum of the energies of the points is less than or equal to the preset value, or it indicates that the first terminal device did not measure the sampling point corresponding to the second bit in each time domain cycle of the first reference signal.
  • the first measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the network device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the first measurement information from the first terminal device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the first measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the number Q of the first value in the configuration information is greater than or equal to the number of bits of the third value in the first measurement information. That is to say, the network device configures the number of sampling points measured by the first terminal device to be greater than or equal to the number of sampling points reported by the first terminal device.
  • Q is 4, and the bit value in the first measurement information is the third value.
  • the quantity is 2.
  • the L bits included in the configuration information are 11001100, indicating that the first terminal device needs to measure 4 sampling points in each time domain cycle, which are the first sampling point, the second sampling point, and the second sampling point. 5 sampling points and the 6th sampling point.
  • the first terminal equipment determines the energy of beam 1 based on the sum of the energy of the 1st sampling point and the 2nd sampling point in each time domain period, and determines the energy of beam 1 based on the energy of the 5th sampling point and the 6th sampling point in each time domain period.
  • the sum of the energies at the sample points determines the energy of beam 2.
  • the first terminal device determines that the energy of beam 1 is greater than the preset value. Therefore, the L bits included in the first measurement information that can be reported by the first terminal device can be 11000000, and the network device can determine that the first target beam is beam 1 based on 11000000.
  • the preset value may be a preconfigured value or a value configured by the network device to the first terminal device.
  • the configuration information determined by the network device is related to the beam used by the network device. Specifically, if the network device uses one beam to send multiple sampling points in each time domain cycle of the first reference signal, the values of the bits corresponding to the multiple sampling points in the configuration information are the same, and they are all the first sampling points. value. At this time, the first terminal device needs to measure the plurality of sampling points in each cycle to achieve measurement of the corresponding beam. If the network device uses one beam to send one sampling point in each time domain cycle of the first reference signal, the value of the bit corresponding to the sampling point in the configuration information is the first value.
  • the network device uses beam 1 to send sampling point 1 and sampling point 2 in each time domain period of the first reference signal, and uses beam 2 to send each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the value of L bits in the configuration information is 11001100.
  • the third value is different from the fourth value, and the first value is different from the second value.
  • the third value may be the same as or different from the first value, or the fourth value may be different from the second value.
  • the values are the same or different.
  • the third value is 1 and the fourth value is 0.
  • the network device may determine the first target wave according to the first measurement information.
  • the network device may use the first target beam to send data to the first terminal device.
  • the network device determines the first target beam according to the first measurement information, including: the network device determines the beam corresponding to the sampling point of the first bit with the third value in the first measurement information as the candidate beam, and A first target beam is determined among the candidate beams.
  • the network device determines the first target beam among the candidate beams, including: the network device determines any beam among the candidate beams as the first target beam.
  • the L bits included in the first measurement information reported by the first terminal device may be 11001100, then the network device will send the first sampling point and Beam 1 of the second sampling point and beam 2 of the fifth and sixth sampling points in each time domain period in which the first reference signal is transmitted are determined as candidate beams.
  • the network device can use any one of the two beams as the first target beam.
  • the L bits included in the configuration information are 1100110000, and the L bits included in the first measurement information are 1100000000, then the network device will send the beams of the first sampling point and the second sampling point. 1 is determined as the first target beam.
  • the sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship can be sampling points in the same time domain period, or they can be sampling points in different time-domain periods.
  • the first terminal device needs to measure all sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship to Determine the sum of the energies at the sampling points to measure the quality of the beam.
  • the first sampling point and the second sampling point of each time domain cycle of the first reference signal have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the first terminal equipment needs to measure the first sampling point in each time domain cycle. 1 sampling point and the 2nd sampling point, calculate the energy sum of these 2M sampling points.
  • the value of the first bit corresponding to the first sampling point in the first measurement information is the third value, and the value corresponding to the second sampling point
  • the value of the second bit is the third value.
  • the L bits included in the first measurement information are 11000000.
  • the network device may receive third measurement information from the first terminal device, where the third measurement information includes the sum of energy of sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship in each time domain period of the first reference signal. .
  • the network device determines the first target beam based on the sum of energy of sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship in each time domain period of the first reference signal included in the third measurement information.
  • the third measurement information may include the sum of H energies obtained according to the sampling points of the H groups of quasi-co-located relationships. Among them, a set of quasi-co-location relationships corresponds to a sum of energies.
  • the network device can determine the maximum energy sum among H energy sums.
  • the maximum energy sum corresponds to a group of target quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the beam that sends the sampling points with the group of target quasi-co-location relationships is First target beam.
  • the L bits included in the configuration information are 11001100, and the first terminal device determines that there are two sets of quasi-co-location relationships, which are the first set of quasi-colocation relationships corresponding to the first sampling point and the second sampling point of each time domain cycle.
  • the co-location relationship, and the fifth and sixth sampling points of each time domain cycle correspond to the second set of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device measures the energy of the first sampling point and the second sampling point of each time domain period to obtain the sum A1 of the energy corresponding to the first group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device measures the energy of each time domain period.
  • the fifth sampling point and the sixth sampling point obtain the energy sum A2 corresponding to the second group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device can report A1 and A2. If A1 is greater than A2, then the network device determines that beam 1 that sends sampling point 1 and sampling point 2 of each time domain cycle is the first target beam. If A1 is less than A2, then the network device determines that beam 1 that sends sampling points of each time domain cycle is the first target beam. Beam 2 at sampling point 5 and 6 is the first target beam.
  • the third measurement signal may include the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of the F groups of quasi-co-located relationships, and F is less than or equal to H.
  • a set of quasi-co-location relationships corresponds to a sum of energies.
  • the sum of F energies is the sum of energies greater than the preset value among the sums of H energies.
  • F is a positive integer less than or equal to H.
  • the second device can directly report the measured energy sum of the sampling points of each group of quasi-co-located relationships or report the energy sum of F groups of sampling points of the quasi-co-located relationship whose energy sum is greater than the preset value.
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points in the embodiment of this application can be The sum of normalized energies.
  • the F bit positions in the third measurement information are in one-to-one correspondence with the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships, and the first terminal device measures the F-group of quasi-co-located sampling points. After the sum of F energies, the F bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry the sum of F energies. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the F bit positions and the F group quasi-colocation relationship.
  • the network device After receiving the third measurement information, the network device determines the F sums of energies that correspond one-to-one with the F group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the F bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the F sums of energies, and sends the The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • H bit positions in the third measurement information correspond to H sums of energies one-to-one, and the H bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry H sums of energies.
  • the network device After receiving the third measurement information, the network device determines the H energy sums corresponding to the H group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the H bit positions, thereby determining the largest energy sum among the H energy sums, and sends the The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • the third measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the network device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the third measurement information from the first terminal device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the third measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the configuration information includes Q indexes, and the Q indexes correspond to Q sampling points one-to-one.
  • the first terminal device determines Q sampling points according to Q indexes, and measures the Q sampling points in each time domain period of the first reference signal. For example, if the network device configures the first terminal device to measure the 1st sampling point, 2nd sampling point, 5th sampling point and 6th sampling point in each time domain cycle in Figure 8, then the configuration information includes The 4 indexes are 0, 1, 4, and 5. Among them, 0 is the index of the 1st sampling point, 1 is the index of the 2nd sampling point, 4 is the index of the 5th sampling point, and 5 is the index of the 6th sampling point.
  • continuous indexes may indicate that the sampling points corresponding to these indices are sent through one beam, that is, the sampling points corresponding to these indices have a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the configuration information includes 0, 1, 4, 5, which means that the network device sent the first sampling point and the second sampling point in each time domain period through one beam, and sent each time domain through another beam. The 5th and 6th sampling points in the cycle.
  • the Q indexes may be numbers between 1 and L, or they may be numbers between 0 and L-1, or they may be other numbers, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first terminal device sends second measurement information to the network device.
  • the second measurement information indicates the target index.
  • the Q indexes include the target index.
  • Each time domain period of the first reference signal is consistent with the target index.
  • the sum of energy of the sampling points corresponding to the index that satisfies the quasi-co-location relationship is greater than the preset value.
  • Target indexes can include one or more.
  • the second measurement information may directly indicate the target index or indirectly indicate the target index.
  • the second measurement information may indicate the interval segment of the target index.
  • the configuration information includes Q indexes 0, 1, and 2.
  • the first sampling point, the second sampling point and the third sampling point in each time domain period have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the first terminal device determines the first reference signal in each time domain period.
  • the sum of the energy of the first sampling point, the second sampling point and the third sampling point is greater than the preset value, then the second measurement information can be 0, 2, 0, 2, indicating that the index in each time domain cycle is 0
  • the sum of energy from the sampling point to the sampling point with index 2 is greater than the preset value. For example, the sum of the energy of the first sampling point, the second sampling point and the third sampling point is greater than the preset value.
  • the preset value may be a preconfiguration or a value configured by the network device to the first terminal device.
  • the preset values in case one and case two may be the same or different, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
  • the second measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the network device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the second measurement information from the first terminal device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the second measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the Q indexes included in the configuration information determined by the network device are related to the beams used by the network device. Specifically, if the network device uses one beam to send multiple sampling points in each time domain period of the first reference signal, the configuration information includes the indices of the multiple sampling points. In other words, if the network device uses one beam to send multiple sampling points, the first terminal device needs to measure the multiple sampling points to achieve the measurement of the sending beam; if the network device uses one beam to send the first reference signal For one sampling point in each time domain cycle, the Q indexes in the configuration information can be determined based on the implementation of the network device.
  • the network device may send the second instruction information and the configuration information to the first terminal device at the same time, or may send the second instruction information and the configuration information to the first terminal device separately.
  • the device sends the second instruction information and the configuration information.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not have any restrictions on the order in which the second instruction information and the configuration information are sent. It can be understood that the network device may send the second indication information and the configuration information to the first terminal device before the first time domain symbol.
  • the network device may receive third measurement information from the first terminal device, where the third measurement information includes the sum of energies of sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the network device determines the first target beam based on the sum of energies of sampling points that satisfy the quasi-co-location relationship included in the third measurement information.
  • the third measurement information may include the sum of H energies obtained from the sampling points of the H groups of quasi-co-located relationships, where one group of quasi-co-located relationships corresponds to one energy sum. In this way, the network device can determine the maximum energy sum among H energy sums. The maximum energy sum corresponds to a group of target quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the beam that sends the sampling point with the group of target quasi-co-location relationships is the first target beam.
  • the four indexes included in the configuration information are 0, 1, 4, and 5 respectively. Since indexes 0 and 1 are two consecutive indexes, and 4 and 5 are two consecutive indexes, the first terminal device determines that there are two sets of accurate indexes.
  • Co-location relationship respectively, the first and second sampling points of each time domain cycle correspond to the first group of quasi-co-location relationships, and the fifth and sixth sampling points of each time domain cycle correspond to The second set of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device measures the energy of the first sampling point and the second sampling point of each time domain period to obtain the sum A1 of the energy corresponding to the first group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device measures the energy of each time domain period.
  • the fifth sampling point and the sixth sampling point obtain the energy sum A2 corresponding to the second group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device can report A1 and A2. If A1 is greater than A2, the network device determines that beam 1 that sends sampling point 1 and sampling point 2 of each time domain cycle is the first target beam; if A1 is less than A2, the network device determines that beam 1 is the first target beam. Beam 2 that transmits sampling point 5 and sampling point 6 of each time domain period is determined to be the first target beam.
  • the third measurement information may include the sum of F energies obtained from sampling points of F groups of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • One set of quasi-co-location relationships corresponds to a sum of energies.
  • the sum of F energies is the sum of energies greater than the preset value among the sums of H energies.
  • F is a positive integer less than or equal to H.
  • the second device can directly report the measured energy sum of the sampling points of each group of quasi-co-located relationships or report the energy sum of F groups of sampling points of the quasi-co-located relationship whose energy sum is greater than the preset value.
  • the F bit positions in the third measurement information are in one-to-one correspondence with the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships, and the first terminal device measures the F-group of quasi-co-located sampling points. After the sum of F energies, in the third The F bit positions of the measurement information carry the sum of F energies respectively. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the F bit positions and the F group quasi-colocation relationship.
  • the network device After receiving the third measurement information, the network device determines the F sums of energies that correspond one-to-one with the F group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the F bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the F sums of energies, and sends the The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • H bit positions in the third measurement information correspond to H sums of energies one-to-one, and the H bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry H sums of energies.
  • the network device After receiving the third measurement information, the network device determines the H energy sums corresponding to the H group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the H bit positions, thereby determining the largest energy sum among the H energy sums, and sends the The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • the third measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the network device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the third measurement information from the first terminal device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the third measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the network device sends the first signal to the second terminal device on the first time domain symbol.
  • the M time domain periods of the first signal correspond to M*L sampling points.
  • Each of the M time domain periods of the first signal corresponds to L sampling points.
  • the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal and the i-th sample among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal The sequence of points is orthogonal.
  • the length of the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal is equal to the length of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the sequence composed of sampling points is of equal length, and the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal is the same as the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the inner product of the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point in the sampling points is zero.
  • the sequence composed of i sampling points is orthogonal.
  • the sequence consisting of the i-th sampling point and the j-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal is the same as the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the sequence composed of the sampling points of the first reference signal is orthogonal to the sequence composed of the sampling points corresponding to the first signal.
  • the two mutually orthogonal sequences can be a sequence composed of one sampling point in each time domain period. It can be a sequence of two or more sampling points in each time domain cycle. Two mutually orthogonal sequences have the same length, and the sampling points that make up each sequence are sampling points at the same position in each time domain cycle.
  • each time domain of the first reference signal The sequence composed of the i-th sampling point and the j-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to the period is the same as the first signal
  • the sequence composed of the i-th sampling point and the j-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period is orthogonal.
  • the L REs span the frequency bands of at least two terminal devices.
  • P REs among the L REs are used to map the first reference signal sent to the first terminal device in S710, and the P REs are located in the frequency band of the first terminal device.
  • the REs except the P REs among the L REs are located in the frequency bands of other terminal devices and do not send any signals.
  • Other terminal devices include second terminal devices.
  • the network device may map the first signal to REs other than L-P REs in the frequency band of other terminal devices, where the L-P REs are REs other than P REs among the L REs.
  • the first sequence includes a sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the first signal may be data or signaling, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the relationship between the M time domain cycles of the first reference signal and the M time domain cycles of the first signal may be: the number of time domain cycles of the first reference signal is the same as the number of time domain cycles of the first signal. , both are M; the number of sampling points in one time domain cycle of the first reference signal is the same as the number of sampling points in one time domain cycle of the first signal, both are L, but one of the first reference signal The sampling points in the time domain period are different from the sampling points in one time domain period of the first signal.
  • the network device sends the first signal to the second terminal device, including: the network device uses REs other than L-P REs in the frequency domain resources of the second terminal device.
  • the first signal is sent to the second terminal device, and the L-P REs are REs other than the P REs among the L REs.
  • method 700 further includes: the network device sends third indication information to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device can receive the third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the network device may send the third indication information to the second terminal device through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • the second terminal device may demodulate the first signal according to the third indication information.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate the frame index of the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, the time slot index of the time slot in the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, and the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. Symbol index within.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate the time slot offset of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located relative to the time slot in which the network device sends the third indication information and the symbols in the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. index. It can be understood that the network device may first send the third indication information to the second terminal device, and then send the first signal to the second terminal device.
  • method 700 may also include: the network device sends fourth indication information to the second terminal device, the second terminal device receives the fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is Indicates the first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth offset value in the frequency domain corresponding to the L REs.
  • the first comb tooth offset value ranges from 0 to M-1.
  • the network device may send the fourth indication information to the second terminal device through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • the second terminal equipment determines the frequency domain positions of the L REs according to the first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth offset value indicated by the fourth indication information, and sets the L-P of the frequency band belonging to the second terminal equipment among the L REs.
  • Each RE is set as a blank RE, and the first signal is demodulated according to the blank RE.
  • the second terminal device needs to determine which REs are blank REs, and when demodulating the first signal, demodulate the first signal according to the blank REs.
  • the network device may send the first signal and the fourth indication information to the second terminal device at the same time, or may send the first signal and the fourth indication information to the second terminal device in sequence. The first signal and the fourth indication information are then sent sequentially.
  • the second terminal device determines, based on the third indication information and the fourth indication information, which of the L REs except P REs. external RE, and demodulates the first signal according to the determined RE.
  • the second terminal device determines REs other than P REs among the L REs according to the third indication information and the fourth indication information, including: the second terminal device determines the first time domain symbol according to the third indication information, The second terminal device determines REs other than P REs among the L REs located on the frequency band of the second terminal device in the first time domain symbol in the frequency band of the second terminal device according to the fourth indication information, and sets these REs to is a blank RE. If the network device sends the fourth indication information and the first signal to the second terminal device, there is no restriction on the order in which the fourth indication information and the first signal are sent.
  • method 700 also includes: the network device sends fifth indication information to the second terminal device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate one of the L REs except P REs.
  • the signal is not mapped on other REs or puncturing is performed on REs other than P REs among the L REs.
  • the second terminal device may demodulate the first signal according to the fifth indication information.
  • the network device may send the fifth indication information to the second terminal device through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • the network device needs to indicate to the second terminal device the implementation method of not sending signals on REs other than P REs among the L REs, so that the second terminal device can use the Implementations that do not send signals on the RE demodulate the first signal from the network device.
  • the second terminal device demodulates the first signal according to the third indication information and the fifth indication information.
  • the second terminal device demodulates the first signal according to the third indication information and the fifth indication information, including: the second terminal device determines the first time domain symbol according to the third indication information, and determines the first time domain symbol according to the fifth indication information.
  • the second terminal device demodulates the first signal according to the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information.
  • the second terminal device demodulates the first signal according to the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information, including: the second terminal device can use the indicated first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth value according to the fourth indication information.
  • the offset value determines L-P resource elements belonging to the frequency band of the second terminal device in the L REs, and determines the implementation method of not sending signals on the L-P REs according to the fifth indication information, thereby demodulating the signal sent to the second terminal device.
  • the first signal the network device sends the third indication information, the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information to the second terminal device, the second terminal device performs the following steps according to the third indication information, the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information. Demodulate the first signal.
  • the second terminal device demodulates the first signal according to the third indication information, the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information, including: the second terminal device determines the first time domain symbol according to the third indication information, and determines the first time domain symbol according to the fourth indication information.
  • the indication information and the frequency band of the second terminal device determine L-P REs except P REs among the L REs in the first time domain symbol, and determine L-P other than P REs among the L REs according to the fifth indication information.
  • the network device can send the first signal and the fifth indication information to the second terminal device at the same time, or in sequence. The first signal and the fifth indication information are sent sequentially. If the network device sends the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information to the second terminal device, there is no restriction on the order in which the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information are sent. If the network device sends the fourth indication information and the fifth indication information to the second terminal device, the network device may send the first message to the second terminal device, the first information bit of the first message is used to carry the fourth indication information, and the first The second information bit of the message is used to carry the fifth indication information.
  • method 700 also includes: the network device sends first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to instruct each of the M time domain periods to send the first reference signal.
  • the i-th sampling point among the corresponding L sampling points has a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the first terminal device can perform the method 900 according to the first instruction information.
  • the way in which the beams in Figure 8 transmit sampling points in the embodiment of this application can be called “interleaved intra-symbol beam training”
  • the way in which the sampling points are sent in Figure 4 can be called “periodic intra-symbol beam training”.
  • Beam training method the sampling points in the same time domain cycle in Figure 4 have a quasi-co-location relationship, and the network equipment uses the same beam to send different sampling points in the same time domain cycle. In this way, the first terminal device needs to measure the sum of the energies of the sampling points within a time domain period to determine the quality of a beam.
  • the first terminal device needs to measure the sum of energy of the sampling points with a quasi-co-location relationship in each time domain period, so as to determine the beam transmitting the sampling points with a quasi-co-location relationship. quality.
  • the first terminal device measures the energy of the beam according to method 900. If the first indication The value of the bit corresponding to the information is 0, indicating that the method of beam sending sampling points is the "periodic intra-symbol beam training" method. The first terminal device measures a time domain period by sending sampling points according to the method shown in Figure 4. The sum of the energies at the inner sampling points determines the quality of a beam.
  • the network device may determine the first indication information according to the current sending behavior. For example, the network device determines that the behavior of sending the first reference signal to the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol is time-shared with the behavior of the network device sending the first signal to other terminal devices, or the network device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device.
  • the first indication information determined by the network device may indicate "periodic intra-symbol beam training", otherwise the first indication information Indicates "interleaved intra-symbol beam training".
  • Other terminal devices include second terminal devices.
  • the network device may send the first indication information to the first terminal device through DCI or MAC CE or radio resource control RRC signaling.
  • the network device when the network device needs to send the first indication information, the second indication information and the configuration information to the first terminal device, the network device can simultaneously send the first indication information, the second indication information and the configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the configuration information may also be sent to the first terminal device respectively with the first indication information, the second indication information and the configuration information.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not have any restrictions on the order in which the first indication information, the second indication information and the configuration information are sent. If the network device simultaneously sends the first indication information, the second indication information and the configuration information to the first terminal device, the network device may send the first indication information, the second indication information and the configuration information to the first terminal device before the first time domain symbol. Configuration information.
  • method 700 may not include S720, that is, the network device does not send the first signal to the second terminal device, and the first signal is not sent by default.
  • the other terminal device is the second terminal device as an example, and the network device sends the first signal to the second terminal device.
  • the network device sends the first signal to the second terminal device.
  • the network device sending other signals to terminal devices other than the second terminal device please refer to the behavior of the network device sending the first signal to the second terminal device.
  • method 700 may be an independent embodiment independent of method 500.
  • method 700 is an embodiment in which the network device sends time domain sampling points to the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • Method 700 may also be an embodiment that relies on method 500, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • method 700 describes that the network device sends the first reference signal to the first terminal device and the first signal to the second terminal device respectively.
  • the first terminal device may receive the first reference signal and the first signal mixed. Two signals.
  • method 900 includes:
  • the first terminal device receives M*L sampling points corresponding to the M time domain periods of the second signal from the first device on the first time domain symbol. Each of the M time domain periods of the second signal The domain period corresponds to L sampling points.
  • the second signal includes a first reference signal sent by the network device to the first terminal device and a first signal sent by the network device to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can not only receive the first reference signal sent by the network device to the first terminal device, but also can receive the first signal sent by the network device to the second terminal device. From the perspective of the first terminal device, it is said that the first terminal device receives the second signal on the first time domain symbol. Before performing the reception processing, the first terminal device cannot respectively perceive the first signal and the first reference signal in the second signal.
  • S910 includes: the terminal device uses a fixed beam to receive M*L sampling points corresponding to M time domain periods of the second signal from the network device within the first time domain symbol.
  • the terminal device uses a fixed beam reception sampling point, which can make the measured transmit beam of the network device more accurate.
  • the first terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the first terminal device may determine the first time domain symbol for intra-symbol beam training according to the second indication information.
  • the second indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the second indication information is specifically used to indicate the frame index of the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, the time slot index of the time slot in the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, and the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. Symbol index within.
  • the second indication information is specifically used to indicate the time slot offset of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located relative to the time slot in which the network device sends the second indication information and the symbols in the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. index.
  • the first terminal device may receive the second indication information through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling.
  • the second indication information may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not place any limitation on the manner of indicating the first time domain symbol.
  • the network device may configure time domain resources for training the transmission beam and time domain resources for training the first terminal device to receive the beam. If the first time domain symbol indicated by the second indication information is a time domain resource for training the transmission beam, the first terminal device determines that the network device needs to train the transmission beam. At this time, the first terminal device can execute S920.
  • the first terminal device determines the energy of the first reference signal in the second signal based on the inner product of the first sequence and the second sequence.
  • the first sequence includes a sequence consisting of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal, and the second sequence includes each time period of the first reference signal local to the first terminal device.
  • the value of i is a partial positive integer from 1 to L.
  • the second sequence is orthogonal to the third sequence
  • the third sequence includes a sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first signal in the second signal. Since the second sequence and the third sequence are orthogonal, the inner product of the first sequence and the second sequence determined by the first terminal device can remove the first reference signal sent to the first terminal device by the first signal pair in the second signal. interference. In this way, the first terminal device can measure the beam sent by the network device by measuring the first reference signal in the second signal.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal is the sampling point to be measured by the first terminal device configured by the network device.
  • the network device may configure the first terminal device to measure some of the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period.
  • the first terminal device may receive configuration information from the network device. The configuration information is used to instruct the first terminal device to measure Q sampling points among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal, and Q is A positive integer less than or equal to L.
  • the first terminal device may receive the configuration information through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling. interest.
  • the first terminal device can perform measurements according to the configuration information.
  • the first terminal device may determine how many groups of quasi-co-location relationships exist based on the configuration information.
  • the first terminal device generates a different second sequence of local first reference signals for each group of quasi-co-location relationships, and generates a second sequence of local first reference signals based on each group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first sequence composed of sampling points corresponding to the quasi-co-location relationship and the second sequence of the locally generated first reference signal determine the sum of energy of each group of sampling points corresponding to the quasi-co-location relationship, and report the measurement information.
  • the following also discusses the manner in which the first terminal device measures the sampling point according to the configuration information sent by the network device in method 700 in two situations.
  • the configuration information configures the first terminal device to measure the first reference signal, but the first terminal device receives the second signal.
  • the first terminal device measures the first reference signal according to the configuration information, which actually measures the received second signal according to the configuration information. Therefore, it can also be understood that the first terminal device measures Q sampling points among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal according to the configuration information, and the Q sampling points include the i-th sampling point in S920. The following describes how the first terminal device measures the second signal.
  • Case 1 corresponding to case 1 of method 700, the configuration information includes L bits.
  • the configuration information of case 1 in method 900 is the same as the configuration information of case 1 in method 700, and will not be described in detail to avoid redundancy.
  • the first terminal device determines that the configuration information configures several groups of sampling points with quasi-co-location relationships, and generates a local first reference signal corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the configuration information. Several corresponding second sequences. In addition, the first terminal device will also determine several first sequences composed of sampling points corresponding to each group of quasi-co-located relationships in each time domain period of the second signal. The first terminal device can calculate the inner product of the first sequence and the second sequence corresponding to each group of quasi-co-located relationships, determine the energy sum of the sampling points in each group of quasi-co-located relationships, and report the measurement information.
  • the first sequence includes a sequence consisting of the i-th sampling point among Q sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal
  • the second sequence includes M time-sampling points of the first reference signal local to the first terminal device.
  • the L bits included in the configuration information are 11001100, L is 8, and Q is 4.
  • the first terminal device determines that there are two sets of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first set of quasi-co-location relationships are the first sampling point and the second sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal.
  • the quasi-co-location relationship is the fifth sampling point and the sixth sampling point in each time domain period of the second signal.
  • the time corresponding to the 3rd sampling point, 4th sampling point, 7th sampling point and 8th sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal is the time required for the network device to switch the beam.
  • the first The end device does not measure these sampling points.
  • the first terminal device generates a first set of sequence 1 corresponding to a quasi-co-location relationship based on the first sampling point and the second sampling point of each time domain cycle of the local first reference signal.
  • the 5th sampling point and the 6th sampling point of each time domain cycle generate a second set of sequence 2 corresponding to the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the first terminal device generates sequence 3 based on the 1st sampling point and the 2nd sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal, and the first terminal device generates sequence 3 based on the 5th sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal.
  • the sampling point and the 6th sampling point generate sequence 4.
  • the first terminal device uses the inner product of sequence 1 and sequence 3 and divides it by the inner product of sequence 1 and sequence 1 to obtain the sum of energy A1 corresponding to the first group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device uses the inner product of sequence 2 and sequence 4.
  • the inner product is divided by the inner product of Sequence 2 and Sequence 2 to obtain the energy sum A2 corresponding to the second set of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • the sum of energy A1 represents the quality of the beam sent by the network device to the first group of sampling points in a quasi-co-located relationship
  • the sum of energy A2 represents the quality of the beam sent by the network device to the second group of sampling points in the quasi-co-located relationship.
  • the first terminal device after determining the energy corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships, sends the first measurement information corresponding to the first time domain symbol to the network device.
  • the first measurement information includes L bits, and the L bits included in the first measurement information correspond one to one to the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the first terminal device determines the target quasi-co-location relationship whose energy sum is greater than the preset value among the energies corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships, and determines the target quasi-co-location relationship included in the first measurement information.
  • the bits corresponding to the sampling points corresponding to the target quasi-co-location relationship among the L bits are set to the third value; the first terminal device sets the bits corresponding to the remaining sampling points among the L bits included in the first measurement information to the fourth value.
  • the L bits included in the first measurement information are 11000000.
  • the first measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the first terminal device may send indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the first measurement information to the network device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the first measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the first terminal device after determining the energy corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships, the first terminal device sends third measurement information to the network device, where the third measurement information includes the energy corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the third measurement information includes the energy sum A1 and the energy sum A2.
  • the F bit positions in the third measurement information are in one-to-one correspondence with the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships, and the first terminal device measures the F-group of quasi-co-located sampling points. After the sum of F energies, the F bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry the sum of F energies. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the F bit positions and the F group quasi-colocation relationship.
  • the network device After receiving the third measurement information, the network device determines the F sums of energies that correspond one-to-one with the F group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the F bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the F sums of energies, and sends the The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • H bit positions in the third measurement information correspond to H sums of energies one-to-one, and the H bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry H sums of energies.
  • the network device After receiving the third measurement information, the network device determines the H energy sums corresponding to the H group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the H bit positions, thereby determining the largest energy sum among the H energy sums, and sends the The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • the third measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the first terminal device may send indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the third measurement information to the network device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the third measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • Case 2 corresponds to case 2 of method 700.
  • the configuration information includes Q indexes, and the Q indexes correspond to Q sampling points one-to-one.
  • the configuration information in case two in method 900 is the same as the configuration information in case two in method 700, and will not be described in detail to avoid redundancy.
  • the first terminal device determines that the configuration information configures several groups of sampling points with quasi-co-location relationships, and generates a local first reference signal corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the configuration information. Several corresponding second sequences. In addition, the first terminal device will also determine several first sequences composed of sampling points corresponding to each group of quasi-co-located relationships in each time domain period of the second signal. The first terminal device can determine the inner product of the first sequence and the second sequence corresponding to each group of quasi-co-located relationships, determine the energy sum of the sampling points in each group of quasi-co-located relationships, and report the measurement information.
  • the first sequence includes a sequence consisting of the i-th sampling point among Q sampling points in each time domain period of the second signal
  • the second sequence includes M time domains of the first reference signal local to the first terminal device.
  • the configuration information includes Q indexes 0, 1, 4, and 5, and Q is 4. Among them, 0 Indicates that the first terminal device measures the 1st sampling point in each time domain cycle, 1 indicates that the first terminal device measures the 2nd sampling point in each time domain cycle, 4 indicates that the first terminal device measures each time domain The 5th sampling point in the cycle, 5 indicates that the first terminal device measures the 6th sampling point in each time domain cycle.
  • the first terminal device determines that there are two sets of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first set of quasi-co-location relationships is the first sampling point and the second sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal
  • the second set of quasi-co-location relationships is the first sampling point and the second sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal. 5 sampling points and the 6th sampling point.
  • the first terminal device generates a first set of sequence 1 corresponding to a quasi-co-location relationship based on the first sampling point and the second sampling point of each time domain cycle of the local first reference signal.
  • the 5th sampling point and the 6th sampling point of each time domain cycle generate a second set of sequence 2 corresponding to the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the first terminal device generates sequence 3 based on the 1st sampling point and the 2nd sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal, and the first terminal device generates sequence 3 based on the 5th sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal.
  • the sampling point and the 6th sampling point generate sequence 4.
  • the first terminal device uses the inner product of sequence 1 and sequence 3 and divides it by the inner product of sequence 1 and sequence 1 to obtain the sum of energy A1 corresponding to the first group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the first terminal device uses the inner product of sequence 2 and sequence 4.
  • the inner product is divided by the inner product of sequence 2 and sequence 1 to obtain the sum of energy A2 corresponding to the second set of quasi-co-located relationships.
  • the sum of energy A1 represents the quality of the beam in which the network device sends the first group of sampling points in a quasi-co-location relationship
  • the sum of energy A2 represents the quality of the beam in which the network device sends the second group of sampling points in the quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the first terminal device determines one or more groups of quasi-co-location relationships whose energy sum is greater than a preset value, and sends the second measurement information to the network device .
  • the second measurement information indicates the target index
  • the Q indexes include the target index
  • the sum of energies of the sampling points having a quasi-co-located relationship with the sampling point indicated by the target index is greater than the preset value.
  • Target indexes can include one or more.
  • the second measurement information may directly indicate the target index or indirectly indicate the target index.
  • the second measurement information may indicate the interval segment of the target index.
  • the Q indexes indicated by the second measurement information are 0,1
  • the second measurement information can directly indicate 0,1 or Indicates 0-1.
  • 0-1 indicates that the sum of energy of all sampling points between the sampling point corresponding to index 0 and the sampling point corresponding to index 1 is greater than the preset value.
  • the second measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the first terminal device may send indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the second measurement information to the network device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the second measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the first terminal device after determining the energy corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships of the first reference signal in the second signal, the first terminal device sends the third measurement information to the network device.
  • the third measurement information includes the energy corresponding to each group of quasi-co-location relationships.
  • the third measurement information includes the energy sum A1 and the energy sum A2.
  • the F bit positions in the third measurement information are in one-to-one correspondence with the sum of F energies obtained from the sampling points of the F group of quasi-co-located relationships, and the first terminal device measures the F-group of quasi-co-located sampling points. After the sum of F energies, the F bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry the sum of F energies. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the F bit positions and the F group quasi-colocation relationship.
  • the network device After receiving the third measurement information, the network device determines the F sums of energies that correspond one-to-one with the F group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the F bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energies among the F sums of energies, and sends the The beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum of the group is the first target beam.
  • H bit positions in the third measurement information correspond to H sums of energies one-to-one, and the H bit positions of the third measurement information respectively carry H sums of energies.
  • network equipment After receiving the third measurement information, the device determines the H sum of energy that corresponds to the H group of quasi-co-location relationships based on the H bit positions, thereby determining the largest sum of energy among the H sums of energy, and sends the group
  • the beam at the sampling point corresponding to the maximum energy sum is the first target beam.
  • the third measurement information may be information measured by the first terminal device within the first time domain symbol. Therefore, the first terminal device may send indication information indicating the first time domain symbol and the third measurement information to the network device. . In this way, the network device can determine that the third measurement information is the measurement information within the first time domain symbol according to the indication information.
  • the indication information may directly indicate the first time domain symbol, or may indicate the first time domain symbol by indicating the resource index of the first reference signal.
  • the first terminal device can learn the first reference signal sent by the network device. That is to say, the first terminal device locally stores the first reference signal. After receiving the second signal, the first terminal device uses a sequence including the i-th sampling point of each time domain period of the second signal and the locally saved i-th sample including each time domain period of the first reference signal. Performing an inner product on the sequence of points can eliminate the interference of the first signal on the first reference signal, thereby making the energy of the first reference signal determined by the first terminal device more accurate.
  • P REs among the L REs in method 500 are used to map the first reference signal, and REs other than P REs among the L REs in method 500 are used.
  • No signal is sent.
  • the network device may map the first signal to REs other than the above-mentioned L-P REs in the frequency band of other terminal devices, where the L-P REs are REs other than P REs among the L REs, and the other terminal devices include the second terminal equipment.
  • the second sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal in the time domain can be made to correspond to each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the third sequence composed of the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points is orthogonal. However, during the actual processing, the first terminal device does not perceive the third sequence.
  • the network device maps the first reference signal on M REs at intervals on the frequency band of the first terminal device, such as RE 2 and RE 3 in Figure 11.
  • the network device sets blank REs at intervals of M REs on the frequency band of the second terminal device, such as RE 1 and RE L.
  • the network device sends the first signal to the second terminal device on REs other than blank REs on the frequency band of the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can either receive the first reference signal r f sent by the network device to the first terminal device, or receive the first signal d f sent by the network device to the second terminal device.
  • r f can be understood as a sequence of first reference signals in the frequency domain sent by the network device to the first terminal device, and r f is filled with zeros at the RE position corresponding to the frequency band of the second terminal device.
  • d f can be understood as a sequence composed of the first signal in the frequency domain sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and d f is filled with zeros at the corresponding RE position in the frequency band of the first terminal device. In this way, it is equivalent to the first terminal device receiving the second signal s f which is the superposition of the first signal in the frequency domain and the first reference signal.
  • the lengths of d f , r f and s f are all the same, for example, N, which means that the frequency band of the first terminal equipment and the frequency band of the second terminal equipment occupy N subcarriers in total.
  • L N/M, that is, there are L frequency domain grids in total.
  • r t may be the aforementioned second sequence
  • d t may be the aforementioned third sequence.
  • i is any integer satisfying 0 ⁇ i ⁇ L.
  • the above formula shows that r t and d t are orthogonal, that is, the second sequence and the third sequence are orthogonal.
  • the first terminal device The first reference signal r f in the frequency domain is transformed into the time domain rt , the first signal d f in the frequency domain is transformed into the time domain d t , and the second signal s f in the frequency domain is transformed into the time domain s t .
  • the first terminal device extracts the sequence consisting of the i-th sampling point in each time domain cycle of the local first reference signal in the time domain as the second sequence r t (mL+i).
  • the first terminal device extracts the received The sequence composed of the i-th sampling point in each time domain cycle of the second signal is the first sequence, and the first terminal device performs an inner product operation on the first sequence and the second sequence:
  • the first terminal device determines the energy of the first reference signal in the second signal according to the result of the inner product operation of the first sequence and the second sequence. In this way, the first terminal device can eliminate the energy in each time domain period of the first signal.
  • the third sequence d t (mL+i) composed of the i-th sample point affects the energy of the first reference signal, thereby making the measurement of the beam more accurate.
  • the method 900 also includes: the first terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, the first indication information is used to indicate each of the M time domain periods in which the first reference signal is sent.
  • the i-th sampling point among the corresponding L sampling points has a quasi-co-location relationship.
  • the first terminal device may receive the first indication information through DCI or MAC CE or RRC signaling. In this way, the first terminal device can perform the method 900 in the embodiment of the present application according to the first instruction information.
  • the way in which the beams in Figure 8 transmit sampling points in the embodiment of this application can be called “interleaved intra-symbol beam training", and the way in which the beams in Figure 4 transmit sampling points can be called “periodic intra-symbol beam training”.
  • “ method if the bit value corresponding to the first indication information is 1, indicating that the method of beam sending sampling points is the "interleaved intra-symbol beam training” method, then the first terminal device measures the energy of the beam according to method 900, if The value of the bit corresponding to the first indication information is 0, indicating that the method of beam sending sampling points is the "periodic intra-symbol beam training" method.
  • the first terminal device measures a time domain according to the method of sending sampling points shown in Figure 4. The sum of the energies at the sampling points within the period determines the quality of a beam.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device are used as examples.
  • the first terminal device is a terminal device that receives the first reference signal sent by the network device
  • the second terminal device is a terminal device that receives the first reference signal sent by the network device.
  • the network device needs to determine P REs in the frequency band or frequency domain resources of the first terminal device, determine L-P blank REs in the frequency band or frequency domain resources of the second terminal device, and do not send any L-P REs to the second terminal device. any signal.
  • the network device can send different signals to more terminal devices (for example, G terminal devices, G is a positive integer), and send the first reference signal to the first terminal device.
  • Each frequency domain raster includes M REs.
  • the network equipment sets corresponding blank REs in the frequency bands or frequency domain resources of different terminal devices, for example, in F terminal devices
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points mentioned in the embodiments of FIGS. 5 to 11 may be the sum of the normalized energies of the sampling points, that is, the sum of the energies of the sampling points of the first terminal device when calculating the first reference signal.
  • the sum of energies needs to be normalized.
  • the first terminal device may use the sequence composed of the received sampling points of the second signal to perform an inner product with the sequence composed of the local first reference signal corresponding to the second signal, and then divide by the sequence composed of the local first reference signal corresponding to the second signal.
  • the inner product of a sequence composed of a reference signal and itself (a sequence composed of a local first reference signal corresponding to the second signal).
  • the above method described in the embodiments of Figures 5 to 11 is to train the transmission beam of the network device.
  • the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to training the reception beam of the first terminal device.
  • the network device uses a fixed beam to send the first reference signal, and the first terminal device switches the beam to receive the first reference signal.
  • the first terminal device uses the same beam to receive sampling points with a quasi-co-location relationship in each time domain period.
  • the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal sent by the network device has a quasi-co-location relationship, In this way, the first terminal device measures the energy of the first reference signal, and determines the second target beam in the receiving beam according to the energy of the first reference signal. To avoid redundancy, this embodiment of the present application does not describe the process of determining the second target beam in detail.
  • the network device needs to precede the first time domain symbol Send first indication information and second indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the above description is a method in the communication process between a network device and a terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to the D2D scenario.
  • the method 1200 in the D2D scenario will be described below with reference to Figure 12.
  • the first device may be a third terminal device
  • the second device may be a fourth terminal device
  • the fourth device may be a fifth terminal device.
  • the method 1200 includes:
  • the fifth terminal device broadcasts the sixth instruction information, and the third terminal device receives the sixth instruction information.
  • the sixth indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the sixth indication information is specifically used to indicate the frame index of the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, the time slot index of the time slot in the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, and the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. Symbol index within.
  • the sixth indication information is specifically used to indicate the time slot offset of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located relative to the time slot in which the fifth terminal device sends the sixth indication information and the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. symbol index.
  • the first time domain symbol may be a first OFDM symbol.
  • the fifth terminal device may send the sixth indication information in MAC CE or RRC signaling or second-stage sidelink control information (SCI 2) through a broadcast message.
  • SCI 2 second-stage sidelink control information
  • the fifth terminal device broadcasts the seventh indication information
  • the third terminal device receives the seventh indication information
  • the seventh indication information instructs the fifth terminal device to send the second resource element corresponding to the second reference signal within the first time domain symbol.
  • the comb tooth value K and the second comb tooth offset value, K is a positive integer
  • the second comb tooth offset value ranges from 0 to K-1.
  • the REs corresponding to the first time domain symbol are M*L REs.
  • M*L/K can also be called the number of frequency domain rasters.
  • Each frequency domain raster includes K REs. That is to say, the first time domain symbol The domain symbol corresponds to M*L REs.
  • the M*L REs may be composed of L frequency domain grids, and each frequency domain grid includes M REs.
  • the M*L REs may be composed of M*L/K frequency domain grids, and each frequency domain grid includes K REs.
  • first comb tooth value M and the second comb tooth value K may be the same or different.
  • the embodiments of this application are not limiting.
  • first comb tooth offset value and the second comb tooth offset value may be the same or different, which are not limited by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the fifth terminal device determines W frequency domain grids within the first time domain symbol, and each frequency domain grid includes K REs.
  • the fifth terminal device determines one RE in each frequency domain raster. In this way, each RE among the W REs comes from a frequency domain raster, and any two REs among the W REs are separated by an integer multiple of K REs. For example, there are K RE intervals, or 2K RE intervals, or 3K RE intervals, etc. K and W are positive integers.
  • the second comb tooth value K is equal to the number of REs included in one frequency domain raster.
  • Each RE among the W REs belongs to a frequency domain grid, and the second comb tooth offset value of each RE among the W REs in the respective frequency domain grids is the same.
  • the first comb tooth value K is the same as the second comb tooth value M
  • the frequency domain resource of the first frequency domain raster is located in the frequency domain resource or frequency band of the fifth terminal device
  • the W REs include RE 1.
  • the comb offset value of each RE in the respective frequency domain raster among the W REs is 2, that is, the fifth terminal device maps the fifth terminal device on the 3rd RE of the first frequency domain raster.
  • the second reference signal will be sent.
  • the fifth terminal device may send the message in MAC CE or RRC signaling or SCI 2 through a broadcast message. Send the seventh instruction message.
  • the second reference signal mapped by the fifth terminal device may be sent to other terminal devices for training the transmitting beam of the fifth terminal device or training the receiving beams of other terminal devices.
  • it may be sent to the sixth terminal device, or it may be sent to the third terminal device or the fourth terminal device, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the terminal device that trains the beam with the fifth terminal device.
  • the fifth terminal device may simultaneously broadcast the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information in the same broadcast message, and the third terminal device may obtain the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information in the same broadcast message.
  • the fifth terminal device may broadcast the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information in different broadcast messages, and the third terminal device may obtain the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information in different broadcast messages. That is to say, the embodiment of the present application does not have any restrictions on the order of S1210 and S1220.
  • the sixth indication information and/or the seventh indication information may also indicate the identity of the peer terminal device that performs intra-symbol beam training.
  • the terminal device that receives the broadcast message can determine the need to send the fifth message based on the identity.
  • the terminal equipment performs beam training.
  • the sixth indication information and/or the seventh indication information indicates the identity of the sixth terminal device. If the third terminal equipment receives the sixth instruction information and/or the seventh instruction information, it is determined according to the identification of the sixth terminal equipment that it does not need to perform beam training with the fifth terminal equipment, that is, it does not need to receive the second instruction sent by the fifth terminal equipment. reference signal.
  • the ninth terminal device receives the sixth indication information and/or the seventh indication information, and the ninth terminal device needs to send the first signal to the tenth terminal device, the ninth terminal device needs to determine according to the sixth indication information.
  • the ninth terminal equipment needs to determine W REs based on the second comb tooth value K and the second comb tooth offset value indicated by the seventh indication information. If the S REs existing among the W REs belong to the ninth The frequency band of the terminal device, then the ninth terminal device sets the corresponding S REs as blank REs when sending the first signal, S is a positive integer less than W, and W is a positive integer. In this way, when the ninth terminal device sends the first signal, it does not send any signal on the S REs.
  • the tenth terminal device may receive indication information indicating the first time domain coincidence, the second comb tooth value K and the second comb tooth offset value from the ninth terminal device, or may directly receive the indication information from the fifth terminal device.
  • the sixth indication information in the broadcast message determines the first time domain symbol, and the first time domain symbol is determined according to the seventh indication information in the broadcast message, thereby determining W REs according to the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information, and determining that they belong to the first time domain symbol.
  • S REs of the frequency band of the ninth terminal device are determined to be blank REs, thereby demodulating the first signal from the ninth terminal device according to the blank REs.
  • the third terminal device determines whether beam training needs to be performed within the first time domain symbol. If the third terminal device determines that beam training needs to be performed within the first time domain symbol, S1220 is executed; otherwise, S1220 is not executed. For example, if the third terminal equipment needs to perform beam training within the second time domain symbol, S1220 will not be executed, but P REs will be determined within the second time domain symbol. Any two REs in the P REs will be separated by an integer multiple of M. RE, P REs in the second time domain symbol map the first reference signal and send it to the fourth terminal device.
  • the third terminal device determines W REs based on the first time domain symbol indicated by the sixth indication information and the second comb tooth value K and the second comb tooth offset value indicated by the seventh indication information.
  • the W REs span at least Frequency domain resources of two devices, any two REs among W REs are separated by an integer multiple of K REs, filter out REs belonging to W REs from the frequency domain resources of the third terminal device, and determine P among L REs RE.
  • the third terminal device needs to filter out the RE correlation with the second reference signal mapped by other terminal devices in the frequency domain resource or frequency band of the fourth terminal device.
  • Linked RE In other words, it is necessary to ensure that the REs mapped by other terminal devices to the second reference signal will not interfere with the REs of the third terminal device.
  • RE 1 in the first frequency domain raster maps the RE of the second reference signal to the fifth terminal device.
  • the frequency band of the sixth terminal device occupies the first frequency domain raster, and the frequency band of the fourth terminal device occupies the second frequency domain. domain raster and the third frequency domain raster, since RE 4 and RE 5 belong to W REs. Therefore, the third terminal device needs to screen out RE 4 and RE 5, thereby determining that the P REs are RE 2 and RE 3.
  • the third terminal device may also send third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the first time domain symbol.
  • the third terminal device may send a broadcast message, and the broadcast message includes third indication information.
  • the third indication information may also indicate the identity of the fourth terminal device.
  • the third terminal device may send third indication information to the fourth terminal device.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate the frame index of the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, the time slot index of the time slot in the frame in which the first time domain symbol is located, and the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. Symbol index within.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate the time slot offset of the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located relative to the time slot in which the third terminal device sends the third indication information and the time slot in which the first time domain symbol is located. symbol index.
  • the third terminal device may also send fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth offset value.
  • the third terminal device may send a broadcast message, and the broadcast message includes fourth indication information.
  • the third terminal device may broadcast the third indication information and the fourth indication information in different broadcast messages.
  • the third terminal device may broadcast the third indication information and the fourth indication information in the same broadcast message. If the seventh terminal device that receives the broadcast message needs to send the first signal on the first time domain symbol indicated by the third indication information, the seventh terminal device needs to send the first signal based on the first comb tooth value M indicated by the fourth indication information and the third A comb tooth offset value determines L REs. If the L-P REs existing among the L REs belong to the frequency band of the seventh terminal device, the seventh terminal device sets the corresponding L-P REs as blank REs when sending the first signal. For descriptions of blank REs, please refer to the description of L-P REs in method 500.
  • the seventh terminal device when the seventh terminal device sends the first signal, it does not send any signal on the L-P REs. If the seventh terminal device that receives the broadcast message does not send any signal, it does not perform any operation.
  • the RE in the L-th frequency domain raster is the frequency band or frequency domain resource of the seventh terminal device, and RE L is separated from RE 3 or RE 2 by an integer multiple of M REs. The seventh terminal equipment does not send any signal on RE L to avoid interference with the third terminal equipment sending the first reference signal on RE 2 and RE 3.
  • the third terminal device needs to receive broadcast messages from other terminal devices (fifth terminal device)
  • the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information in determine the REs to which other terminal devices may map the reference signal.
  • the third terminal device maps the first reference signal sent to the fourth terminal device, it needs to filter out the REs of the reference signals mapped by other terminal devices, thereby preventing the reference signals mapped by other terminal devices from interfering with the reference signals sent by the third terminal device to the first terminal.
  • the device's reference signal enables the third terminal device to determine P REs in a scenario where there is no central scheduling node.
  • the third terminal device maps the first reference signal to be sent to the fourth terminal device on P REs.
  • P REs are located in the frequency band of the third terminal equipment.
  • REs other than P REs among the L REs belong to frequency domain resources of other terminal devices, and other terminal devices do not send any signals on REs other than P REs among the L REs.
  • the P REs can also be understood as the frequency band of the fourth terminal device.
  • the frequency band used by the third terminal device and the fourth terminal device in the communication process can be understood as the frequency band of the third terminal device.
  • OK It is understood as the frequency band of the fourth terminal device, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the third terminal device and the network device in S520 map the first reference signal to be sent to the first terminal device similarly, and will not be described in detail to avoid redundancy.
  • the L REs span frequency domain resources of at least two devices, the P REs belong to the frequency domain resources of the fourth terminal device, and the L-P REs include the frequency domain resources of the seventh terminal device.
  • the third terminal device may determine P REs based on receiving the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information sent by the fifth terminal device, and map the first reference signal to be sent to the fourth terminal device on the P REs.
  • the number of REs between any two REs in RE is an integer multiple of M.
  • the fourth terminal device can measure different sampling points of the first reference signal in the time domain to measure different beams, thereby improving the accuracy of the measured beams, and can also train multiple beams within one time domain symbol, thereby Can reduce resource overhead.
  • the third terminal device may send the third indication information and the fourth indication information.
  • the seventh terminal device may send the third indication information and the fourth indication information.
  • the seventh terminal equipment needs to determine L REs based on the first comb tooth value M and the first comb tooth offset value. If the L-P REs existing in the L REs belong to the frequency band of the seventh terminal equipment, then the seventh terminal equipment transmits the first When sending a signal, the corresponding L-P REs are set as blank REs, so that when the seventh terminal device sends the first signal, it does not send any signals on the L-P REs.
  • the seventh terminal device can send no signals except the L-P blank REs.
  • the first signal sent by the seventh terminal device can be prevented from interfering with the first reference signal sent by the third terminal device to the fourth terminal device, and the flexibility of resource scheduling can also be improved. If the seventh terminal device that receives the third indication information and the fourth indication information does not send any signal, no operation is performed.
  • the third terminal device can send the sampling point corresponding to the first reference signal in the time domain.
  • the following describes how the third terminal device sends The sampling point corresponding to the first reference signal, and the fourth terminal device measures the sampling point corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the third terminal device sends M*L sampling points corresponding to the M time domain periods of the first reference signal to the fourth terminal device within the first time domain symbol.
  • Each time domain in the M time domain periods of the first reference signal A period corresponds to L sampling points, and the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period has a quasi-co-location relationship, and the value of i is a positive integer from 1 to L.
  • the method in which the third terminal device sends M*L sampling points corresponding to the M time domain periods of the first reference signal to the fourth terminal device is the same as the method in which the network device sends M of the first reference signal to the first terminal device in S710.
  • the method of M*L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period is similar.
  • the network device sends the configuration information to the first terminal device, then in S1200, the third terminal device can also send the configuration information to the fourth terminal device.
  • the fourth terminal device measures the first reference signal based on the configuration information and reports it.
  • the third terminal device determines the target beam based on the measurement information reported by the fourth terminal device. To avoid redundancy, the detailed description will not be given.
  • the seventh terminal device needs to send the first signal according to the first comb tooth value M and the first The comb offset value determines L REs. If the LP REs existing among the L REs belong to the frequency band of the seventh terminal device, the seventh terminal device sets the corresponding LP REs as blank REs when sending the first signal. For the description of the REs, please refer to the description of the LP REs in the method 500. In this way, when the seventh terminal device sends the first signal, it does not send any signal on the LP REs. In the time domain, the seventh terminal device transmits the first signal in the first time domain symbol.
  • the first signal is sent to the eighth terminal device, the M time domain periods of the first signal correspond to M*L sampling points, and each of the M time domain periods of the first signal corresponds to L sampling points.
  • the method for the seventh terminal device to send the first signal to the eighth terminal device refers to S720 in which the network device sends the first signal to the second terminal device. The method for the device to send the first signal will not be described in detail to avoid redundancy. If the seventh terminal device that receives the third indication information and the fourth indication information does not send any signal, no operation is performed.
  • the above method 1200 describes that the third terminal device sends the first reference signal to the fourth terminal device, the seventh terminal device sends the first signal to the eighth terminal device, or the ninth terminal device sends the first signal to the tenth terminal device.
  • the fourth terminal device may receive a second signal that is a mixture of the first reference signal and the first signal. The process of processing the signal by the fourth terminal device is described below in conjunction with the method 1400 in FIG. 14 .
  • the fourth terminal device receives M*L sampling points corresponding to M time domain cycles of the second signal on the first time domain symbol, and each time domain cycle of the M time domain cycles of the second signal corresponds to L sampling points. Sampling point.
  • the fourth terminal device in S1410 is similar to the first terminal device in S910.
  • the fourth terminal device may receive the third indication information directed to the fourth terminal device by the third terminal device, and determine the first time domain symbol according to the third indication information.
  • the fourth terminal device may receive the third indication information broadcast by the third terminal device in the broadcast message, and the third indication information may also indicate the identity of the fourth terminal device.
  • the fourth terminal device may respond according to the identity of the fourth terminal device.
  • the first time domain symbol indicated by the third indication information is determined to be the time domain symbol of the training transmission beam of the third terminal device.
  • the fourth terminal device determines the energy of the first reference signal in the second signal based on the inner product of the first sequence and the second sequence.
  • the first sequence includes L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the second signal.
  • the second sequence includes the i-th sampling point among the L sampling points in each of the M time domain periods of the first reference signal local to the fourth terminal device.
  • the fourth terminal device in S1420 is similar to the first terminal device in S920.
  • For the process performed by the fourth terminal device in S1420 please refer to the process performed by the first terminal device in S920. To avoid redundancy, it will not be described in detail.
  • the seventh terminal device may be the same terminal device as the ninth terminal device, or the eighth terminal device may be the same terminal device as the tenth terminal device. That is to say, for the convenience of description, different terminal device descriptions are sampled above. In fact, there may be two terminal devices among these terminal devices that are the same terminal device.
  • the sum of the energies of the sampling points mentioned in the embodiments of FIGS. 12 to 14 may be the sum of the normalized energies of the sampling points, that is, the fourth terminal device calculates the sum of the energies of the sampling points of the first reference signal.
  • the energy sum needs to be normalized.
  • the fourth terminal device can use the sequence composed of the received sampling points of the second signal to perform an inner product with the sequence composed of the local first reference signal corresponding to the second signal, and then perform an inner product. Divided by the inner product of the sequence composed of the local first reference signal corresponding to the second signal and itself (the sequence composed of the local first reference signal corresponding to the second signal).
  • the above embodiments of Figures 12 to 14 describe training the transmitting beam of the third terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to training the receiving beam of the fourth terminal device.
  • the third terminal device uses a specific beam to send the first reference signal
  • the fourth terminal device changes the beam to receive the first reference signal
  • the third terminal device sends L sampling points corresponding to each time domain period of the first reference signal.
  • the i-th sampling point in has a quasi-co-location relationship, so that the fourth terminal device measures the energy of the first reference signal and determines the target beam in the receiving beam according to the energy of the first reference signal.
  • the embodiments of this application will not be detailed. Describe the process of determining the second target beam.
  • FIG. 15 shows a communication device 1500 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1500 includes a processor 1510 and a transceiver 1520.
  • the processor 1510 and the transceiver 1520 communicate with each other through an internal connection path, and the processor 1510 is used to execute instructions to control the transceiver 1520 to send signals and/or receive signals.
  • the communication device 1500 may also include a memory 1530, which communicates with the processor 1510 and the transceiver 1520 through internal connection paths.
  • the memory 1530 is used to store instructions, and the processor 1510 can execute the instructions stored in the memory 1530 .
  • the communication device 1500 is used to implement various processes and operations corresponding to the first device or the network device or the third terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1500 is used to implement various processes and operations corresponding to the second device, the first terminal device, or the fourth terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1500 is used to implement various processes and operations corresponding to the third device, the second terminal device, or the seventh terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1500 may be specifically the first device or the network device or the third terminal device or the second device or the first terminal device or the fourth terminal device or the third device or the second terminal device or the third terminal device in the above embodiments. Seven terminal devices can also be chips or chip systems.
  • the transceiver 1520 may be the transceiver circuit of the chip, which is not limited here.
  • the communication device 1500 can be used to communicate with the first device or network device or the third terminal device or the second device or the first terminal device or the fourth terminal device or the third device or the second terminal in the above method embodiment. Each operation and/or process corresponding to the device or the seventh terminal device.
  • the memory 1530 may include read-only memory and random access memory, and provide instructions and data to the processor.
  • a portion of the memory may also include non-volatile random access memory.
  • the memory may also store device type information.
  • the processor 1510 may be configured to execute instructions stored in the memory, and when the processor 1510 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 1510 is configured to execute the above-mentioned communication with the first device or network device or the third terminal device or the third terminal device.
  • Each operation and/or process of the method embodiment corresponding to the second device or the first terminal device or the fourth terminal device or the third device or the second terminal device or the seventh terminal device.
  • each operation of the above method can be completed through the integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the operations of the methods disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the operations of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each operation of the above method embodiment can be completed through the integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components. .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the operations of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other mature storage media in this field.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the operations of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase electrically programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • RAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes: computer program code.
  • the computer program code When the computer program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the first step in the above method embodiment. Each operation or process performed by a device or a network device or a third terminal device or a second device or a first terminal device or a fourth terminal device or a third device or a second terminal device or a seventh terminal device.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores program code.
  • the program code When the program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the above method embodiment.
  • the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned one or more first devices and one or more second devices; or includes the aforementioned one or more first devices , one or more second devices and one or more third devices.
  • the communication unit performs the receiving or transmitting operations in the method embodiments.
  • Other operations may be performed by the processing unit (processor).
  • the functions of specific units may be based on corresponding method embodiments.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (program) are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the operations of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种用于处理信号的方法和通信装置。该方法中，第一设备可以在第一时域符号对应的资源元素中确定L个资源元素中的P个资源元素，P个资源元素用于映射将要发送给第二设备的第一参考信号，L个资源元素中除了P个资源元素之外的资源元素不发送任何信号。L个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔M的整数倍个资源元素，第二设备在特定的采样点上接收到的第一参考信号将不会受到第一时域符号对应的除L个资源元素以外的资源元素上映射的信号的干扰。第二设备可以测量第一参考信号在时域上的不同的采样点的能量，从而实现对不同的波束的测量，既可以提高测量波束的准确性，也能在一个时域符号内训练多个波束，从而降低资源开销。

Description

用于处理信号的方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2022年03月24日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202210303709.3、申请名称为“一种波束训练方法”，以及，要求于2022年07月08日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202210806902.9、申请名称为“用于处理信号的方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，并且更具体地涉及通信领域中用于处理信号的方法和通信装置。
背景技术
两个设备在通信的过程中，为了克服通信中的路损，可以通过定向波束传输信号。两个设备在传输信号之前，需要进行波束训练。传统的波束训练方法中，一个时域符号上只能训练一个波束。当待训练的波束较多时，训练波束所占的时域资源会变多，导致训练波束的开销较大。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种用于处理信号的方法和通信装置，能够降低波束训练的开销。
第一方面，提供了一种用于处理信号的方法，所述方法适用于第一设备，包括：确定L个资源元素中的P个资源元素，所述L个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔M的整数倍个资源元素，所述L个资源元素为第一时域符号对应的频域资源，所述L个资源元素横跨至少两个设备的频域资源，所述P个资源元素属于第二设备的频域资源；
在所述P个资源元素上映射将要发送给所述第二设备的第一参考信号，其中，所述L个资源元素中除了所述P个资源元素之外的资源元素属于其他设备的频域资源，并且不发送任何信号，所述至少两个设备包括所述第二设备和所述其他设备；
其中，M、L和P为正整数，L大于或等于P。
在上述方案中，第一设备可以在第一时域符号对应的资源元素中确定L个资源元素中的P个资源元素，并在这P个资源元素上映射将要发送给第二设备的第一参考信号。L个资源元素中除了P个资源元素之外的资源元素不发送任何信号。L个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔M的整数倍个资源元素，这样第一设备发送的第一参考信号具有梳状结构。此时，第二设备在特定的采样点上接收到的第一参考信号将不会受到第一时域符号对应的资源元素中除L个资源元素以外的资源元素上映射的信号的干扰。第二设备可以测量第一参考信号在第一时域符号上的不同的采样点的能量，从而实现对不同的波束的测量，既可以提高测量波束的准确性，也能在一个时域符号内训练多个波束，从而降低资源开销。
可选地，第一设备可以为网络设备，第二设备为第一终端设备，至少两个设备可以为至少两个终端设备。
可选地，第一设备为第三终端设备，第二设备为第四终端设备，至少两个设备可以为 至少两个终端设备。
可选地，第一时域符号可以为第一正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号。
可选地，P个RE属于第二设备的频域资源可以理解为：第二设备的频域资源包括P个RE，或者P个RE位于第二设备的频带，或者第二设备的频带包括P个RE。
可选地，L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE不发送任何信号可以理解为：第一设备在L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE不映射任何信号，或者，第一设备在L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE映射信号，但是对L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE进行打孔(punctuation)处理。可选地，L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE也可以称为空白RE。
可选地，第二设备的频域资源中P个RE用于映射第一参考信号，第一设备在第二设备的频域资源中除了P个RE之外的RE不映射任何信号。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：在所述第一时域符号内向所述第二设备发送所述第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，所述第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系，i的取值为1至L中的部分正整数，所述第一设备还用于向第三设备发送第一信号，所述第一信号的M个时域周期对应M*L个采样点，所述第一信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点，所述其他设备包括所述第三设备；
其中，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与所述第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列正交；
其中，M和L为正整数。
在上述方案中，第一时域符号内可以发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点。第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有准共址关系，也就是说，每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有相同的空域滤波参数。换言之，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点的收发波束相同。此外，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列正交。如果只考察这些采样点，则第一设备向第二设备发送的第一参考信号与向第三设备发送的第一信号互不干扰，使得第二设备测量得到的第一参考信号的能量中不会有第一信号的能量，从而可以使得第二设备测量第一参考信号的能量比较准确，提高训练波束的准确性。
可选地，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有准共址关系，可以为：每个时域周期的L个采样点中一部分采样点具有一组准共址关系，每个时域周期的L个采样点中另一部分采样点具有一组准共址关系，每个时域周期的L个采样点中又一部分采样点具有一组准共址关系，依次类推，可以共有H组准共址关系，H为正整数。其中，每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中不具有准共址关系的采样点所对应时间可以理解为切换波束所需的时间，例如，在1至L中i没取的那些值对应的采样点的时间为切换波束所需的时间，例如，可以是第一设备切换发送波束所需的时间或者第二设备切换接收波束所需的时间。
可选地，第一设备在每个时域周期内切换发送波束发送采样点的行为都是相同的，换 句话说，第一设备发送第一参考信号时对波束的切换行为具有周期性。
可选地，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有准共址关系可以理解为：第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点的空域滤波参数相同或者第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点的收发波束相同或者第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点经过了相同的传输信道。
在一些可能的实现方式中，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点和第j个采样点具有准共址关系，j的取值为1至L中的部分正整数，i和j不同。也就是说，具有准共址关系的多个采样点可以包括同一周期的采样点，还可以包括不同周期的采样点。在一些可能的实现方式中，所述配置信息包括L个比特。所述配置信息包括的L个比特与所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应。所述配置信息包括的L个比特中的Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值，表示所述第二设备测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述Q个比特一一对应的Q个采样点；所述配置信息包括的L个比特中除了所述Q个比特之外的L-Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第二取值，表示所述第二设备不测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点。
其中，所述第二设备不测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点所对应时间可以理解为第一设备切换波束的时间。
在上述方案中，第一设备可以通过位图的方式向第二设备指示测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的哪些采样点，且第二设备针对每个时域周期中的测量行为都是一致的。
可选地，Q个比特中连续的几个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值时，表示每个时域周期中这几个比特对应的采样点具有准共址关系。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二设备接收第一时域符号对应的第一测量信息，所述第一测量信息包括L个比特。所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特与所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应。所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特中的第一比特的取值为第三取值，表示所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第一比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值；所述L个比特中的第二比特的取值为第四取值，表示所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和小于或等于预设值，或者表示所述第二设备没有测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点，不测量的上述采样点对应的时间为切换波束的时间，因此没有测量的必要。
可选地，配置信息中取值为第一取值的比特的数量Q大于或等于第一测量信息中取值为第三取值的比特的数量。
可选地，与第一比特对应的采样点满足一组准共址关系的采样点包括同一时域周期的采样点，还可以包括不同时域周期的采样点。第二设备需要测量满足一组准共址关系的所有采样点，来确定采样点的能量和，从而对波束进行测量。
可选地，一组准共址关系对应同一对收发波束。不同组准共址关系对应不同对的收发波束。
可选地，与第二比特对应的采样点满足一组准共址关系的采样点可以是同一时域周期 的采样点，还可以是不同时域周期的采样点，第二设备需要测量满足一组准共址关系的所有采样点，来确定采样点的能量和，从而对波束进行测量。
可选地，第一测量信息可以为第二设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第一设备可以从第二设备接收指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第一测量信息，这样，第一设备可以根据指示信息确定第一测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述配置信息包括所述Q个索引，所述Q个索引与所述Q个采样点一一对应。
在上述方案中，第二设备根据Q个索引确定Q个采样点，并测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的Q个采样点，且每个时域周期中的测量行为是一致的。
可选地，Q个索引可以是1到L之间的编号，或者也可以是0到L-1之间编号，或者也可以是其他的编号，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第二测量信息，所述第二测量信息指示目标索引，所述Q个索引包括所述目标索引，所述每个时域周期中与所述目标索引对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。
可选地，目标索引可以包括一个或多个。可选地，第二测量信息可以直接指示目标索引也可以间接指示目标索引。
可选地，第二测量信息可以为第二设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第一设备可以从第二设备接收指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第二测量信息，这样，第一设备可以根据指示信息确定第二测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第三测量信息，所述第三测量信息包括第一参考信号的每个时域周期中满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信息可以包括H组准共址关系的采样点得到的H个能量之和，即一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和。可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信息可以包括F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和。具体而言，一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和，F个能量之和为H个能量之和中大于预设值的能量之和，F为小于或等于H的正整数。换句话说，第二设备可以直接上报测量得到的每组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和，或者上报能量之和大于预设值的F组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
可选地，第三测量信息中F个比特位置与F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和一一对应，第二设备测量F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和后，在第三测量信息的F个比特位置上分别承载F个能量之和。F个比特位置与F组准共址关系一一对应。第一设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据F个比特位置确定与F组准共址关系一一对应的F个能量之和，从而在F个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对 应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息中H个比特位置与H个能量之和一一对应，第三测量信息的H个比特位置上分别承载H个能量之和。H个比特位置与H组准共址关系一一对应。第一设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据H个比特位置确定与H组准共址关系一一对应的H个能量之和，从而在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，本申请实施例中的采样点的能量之和可以为采样点的归一化能量之和。
可选地，第三测量信息可以为第二设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第一设备可以从第二设备接收指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第三测量信息，这样，第一设备可以根据指示信息确定第三测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第二设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号内发送的所述第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系。
可选地，第一设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者无线资源控制RRC信令向第二设备发送第一指示信息。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第二设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
可选地，第二指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号。具体地，第二指示信息用于指示第一时域符号所在的帧的帧索引，第一时域符号所在的帧内的时隙的时隙索引以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第二指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在时隙相对于第一设备发送第二指示信息的时隙的时隙偏移以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。
可选地，第二指示信息可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
可选地，若第一设备为网络设备，第一设备可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)或者媒体接入控制(medium access control，MAC)控制元素(control element，CE)或者无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)信令向第二设备发送第二指示信息。可选地，若第一设备为第三终端设备，第一设备可以通过SCI 2或者MAC CE或者RRC信令发送第二指示信息。
在一些可能的实现方式中，发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
可选地，第三指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在的帧的帧索引，第一时域符号所在的帧内的时隙的时隙索引以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第三指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在时隙相对于第一设备发送第三指示信息的时隙的时隙偏移以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。
可选地，所述发送第三指示信息包括：向所述第三设备发送第三指示信息，或者广播第三指示信息。
可选地，在第一设备为网络设备，第三设备为第二终端设备的情况下，向所述第三设 备发送第三指示信息，包括：网络设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息。在第一设备为第三终端设备，第三设备为第四终端设备的情况下，向所述第三设备发送第三指示信息，包括：第三终端设备可以通过SCI 2或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第四终端设备发送第三指示信息。
可选地，在第一设备为第三终端设备，第三设备为第四终端设备的情况下，广播第三指示信息，包括：第三终端设备可以通过广播消息中的SCI 2或者MAC CE或者RRC信令广播第三指示信息。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述L个资源元素对应的第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值，所述第一梳齿偏移值的取值范围为0至M-1。
可选地，发送第四指示信息，包括：向所述第三设备发送第四指示信息，或者广播第四指示信息。
可选地，在第一设备为网络设备，第三设备为第二终端设备的情况下，向所述第三设备发送第四指示信息，包括：网络设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息。在第一设备为第三终端设备，第三设备为第四终端设备的情况下，第三终端设备可以通过SCI 2或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第四终端设备发送第四指示信息。
可选地，在第一设备为第三终端设备，第三设备为第四终端设备的情况下，广播第四指示信息，包括：第三终端设备可以通过广播消息中的SCI 2或者MAC CE或者RRC信令广播第四指示信息。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第三设备发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示所述L个资源元素中除了所述P个资源元素之外的资源元素上不映射信号或者在所述L个资源元素中除了所述P个资源元素之外的资源元素上进行打孔。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：接收第四设备广播的第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息指示所述第一时域符号；接收第四设备广播的第七指示信息，所述第七指示信息用于指示所述第四设备在所述第一时域符号内发送第二参考信号的资源元素对应的第二梳齿值K和第二梳齿偏移值，K为正整数，所述第二梳齿偏移值的取值范围为0至K-1。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：根据所述第六指示信息指示的所述第一时域符号和所述第七指示信息指示的所述第二梳齿值K和所述第二梳齿偏移值确定W个资源元素，所述W个资源元素横跨所述至少两个设备的频域资源，所述W个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔K的整数倍个资源元素，W为正整数；其中，所述确定L个资源元素中的P个资源元素，包括：从所述第一设备的频域资源中筛选掉属于所述W个资源元素的资源元素，确定所述L个资源元素中的P个资源元素。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：根据所述第六指示信息指示的所述第一时域符号和所述第七指示信息指示的所述第二梳齿值K和所述第二梳齿偏移值确定W个资源元素，所述W个资源元素横跨所述至少两个设备的频域资源，所述W个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔K的整数倍个资源元素，W为正整数；从所述第一设备的频域资源中筛选掉属于所述W个资源元素的资源元素，确定第一设备发送其他信号的资源元素。
第二方面，提供了一种用于处理信号的方法，包括：所述方法适用于第二设备，包括：在第一时域符号上接收来自第二信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，所述第二信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点；根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量，所述第一序列包括所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列，所述第二序列包括本地的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中的每个时域周期中的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列；
其中，M和L为正整数，i的取值为1至L中的部分正整数。
在上述方案中，第二设备在确定第二信号中第一参考信号的能量的过程中，第二设备能够获知第一设备发送的第一参考信号，也就是说，第二设备在本地保存有第一参考信号，第二设备接收到第二信号之后，利用第二信号的每个时域周期的第i个采样点组成的序列与本地保存的第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第i个采样点组成的序列进行内积的过程中，可以消除其他信号(第一时域符号对应的除L个资源元素以外的资源元素上映射的信号)对第一参考信号的干扰，从而可以使得第二设备确定的第一参考信号的能量比较准确。
可选地，第二信号包括发送给第二设备的第一参考信号和发送给第三设备的第一信号。可替换的，第二信号由发送给第二设备的第一参考信号和发送给第三设备的第一信号组成。换句话说，第二设备不仅可以接收到发送给第二设备的第一参考信号也能接收到发送给第三设备的第一信号。从第二设备的角度而言，称为第二设备在第一时域符号上接收到第二信号。但是第二设备感知不到接收到的第二信号是第一参考信号与第一信号的组合。第二设备利用第二信号的每个时域周期的第i个采样点组成的序列与本地保存的第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第i个采样点组成的序列进行内积的过程中，可以消除第一信号对第一参考信号的干扰，从而可以使得第二设备确定的第一参考信号的能量比较准确。
可选地，第二设备采用固定的波束在第一时域符号内接收第二信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，也就是说，在测量第一设备的发送波束的过程中，第二设备采用固定的波束接收采样点。这样，可以使得测量的第一设备的发送波束更准确，避免第二设备换波束接收时，导致测量的不准确。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述第一序列还包括所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第j个采样点组成的序列，所述第二序列还包括本地的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中的每个时域周期中的L个采样点中的第j个采样点组成的序列，j的取值为1至L中的部分正整数，i不等于j。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第一设备接收配置信息，所述配置信息用于指示所述第二设备测量所述第二信号中的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的Q个采样点，所述Q个采样点包括所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述配置信息包括L个比特，所述配置信息包括的L个比特与所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应。所述配置信息包括的L个比特中的Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值，表示所述第二设备测量所述第二信号的每个时域周期中与所述Q个比特一一对应的Q个采样点；所述L个比特中除了所述Q个比特之外的L-Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第二取值，表示所述第二设备不测量所述第二信号的每个时域周期中与所述L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点。
其中，所述第二设备不测量所述第二信号的每个时域周期中与所述L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点所对应时间可以理解为第一设备切换波束的时间。
可选地，Q个比特中连续的几个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值时，表示每个时域周期中这几个连续的比特对应的连续的采样点具有准共址关系。第二设备可以根据Q个比特确定共有几组准共址关系，然后计算每组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
在一些可能的实现方式中，在所述根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量之后，所述方法还包括：
向所述第一设备发送所述第一时域符号对应的第一测量信息，所述第一测量信息包括L个比特，所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特与所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应。所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特中的第一比特的取值为第三取值，表示所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第一比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值；所述L个比特中的第二比特的取值为第四取值，表示所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点的能量之和小于或等于预设值，或者表示所述第二设备没有测量所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与第二比特对应的采样点。
可选地，第一测量信息可以为第二设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第二设备可以向第一设备发送指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第一测量信息，这样，第一设备可以根据指示信息确定第一测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
可选地，与第一比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和为第一参考信号的能量的一部分，与第二比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和为第一参考信号的能量的一部分。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述配置信息包括所述Q个索引，所述Q个索引与所述Q个采样点一一对应。
可选地，Q个索引可以是1到L之间的编号，或者也可以是0到L-1之间编号，或者也可以是其他的编号，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
可选地，Q个索引中连续的几个索引对应连续的几个采样点，连续的这几个采样点具有准共址关系。第二设备可以根据Q个索引确定共有几组准共址关系，然后计算每组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
在一些可能的实现方式中，在所述根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量之后，所述方法还包括：向所述第一设备发送第二测量信息。所述第二测量信息指示目标索引，所述Q个索引包括所述目标索引。所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述目标索引对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。
可选地，第二测量信息可以为第二设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第二设备可以向第一设备发送指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第二测量信息，这样，第一设备可以根据指示信息确定第二测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符 号。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第一设备发送所述第一时域符号对应的第三测量信息，所述第三测量信息包括满足第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信息可以包括H组准共址关系的采样点得到的H个能量之和，即一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和。可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信号可以包括F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和，其中一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和，F个能量之和为H个能量之和中大于预设值的能量之和，F为小于或等于H的正整数。换句话说，第二设备可以直接上报测量得到的每组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和或者上报能量之和大于预设值的F组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
可选地，第三测量信息中F个比特位置与F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和一一对应，第二设备测量F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和后，在第三测量信息的F个比特位置上分别承载F个能量之和。F个比特位置与F组准共址关系一一对应。第一设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据F个比特位置确定与F组准共址关系一一对应的F个能量之和，从而在F个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息中H个比特位置与H个能量之和一一对应，第三测量信息的H个比特位置上分别承载H个能量之和。H个比特位置与H组准共址关系一一对应。第一设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据H个比特位置确定与H组准共址关系一一对应的H个能量之和，从而在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，本申请实施例中的采样点的能量之和可以为采样点的归一化能量之和。可选地，第二设备可以确定哪些采样点具有一组准共址关系，第二设备利用接收到的具有一组准共址关系的采样点组成的第一序列与该组具有准共址关系的采样点对应的本地第二序列的内积再除以本地的第二序列确定该组具有准共址关系的采样点的归一化能量之和。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第一设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号内发送第二信号中的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第一设备接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
对上述可能的实现方式，第二方面的描述可以参见第一方面的描述，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
第三方面，提供了一种用于解调信号的方法，所述方法适用于第三设备，包括：
接收第四指示信息和第一信号，所述第四指示信息用于指示L个资源元素对应的第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值，所述第一梳齿偏移值的取值范围为0至M-1，所述L个资源元素为所述第一时域符号对应的频域资源；
根据所述第四指示信息指示的所述第一梳齿值M和所述第一梳齿偏移值确定属于所述第三设备的频域资源的L-P个资源元素，所述L-P个资源元素上不发送任何信号；
根据所述L-P个资源解调所述第一信号。
可选地，接收第四指示信息，包括：从第一设备接收第四指示信息。可选地，若第一设备为第三终端设备，第三设备为第四终端设备，从第一设备接收第四指示信息，包括：第四终端设备接收第三终端设备广播第四指示信息。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号；
其中，所述根据所述L-P个资源解调所述第一信号，包括：
根据所述第三指示信息指示的所述第一时域符号内的所述L-P个资源解调所述第一信号。
可选地，接收第三指示信息，包括：从第一设备接收第三指示信息。可选地，若第一设备为第三终端设备，第三设备为第四终端设备，从第一设备接收第三指示信息，包括：第四终端设备接收第三终端设备广播第三指示信息。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：接收第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示所述L-P个资源元素上不映射信号或者在所述L-P个资源元素上进行打孔；
其中，所述根据所述第三指示信息指示的所述第一时域符号内的所述L-P个资源解调所述第一信号，包括：
根据所述第一时域符号内的所述L-P个资源元素上不映射信号或者所述L-P个资源元素上打孔解调所述第一信号。
其中，第三方面的描述可以参见第一方面的描述，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
第四方面，提供了一种用于处理信号的方法，所述方法适用于第一设备，包括：在第一时域符号内向第二设备发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点。其中，第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系，i的取值为1至L中的部分正整数。所述第一设备还用于向第三设备发送第一信号，所述第一信号的M个时域周期对应M*L个采样点，所述第一信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点；
其中，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与所述第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列正交；其中，M和L为正整数。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点和第j个采样点具有准共址关系，j的取值为1至L的中的部分正整数，i不等于j。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
向所述第二设备发送配置信息，所述配置信息用于指示所述第二设备测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的Q个采样点；
其中，Q为小于或等于L的正整数。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述配置信息包括L个比特，所述配置信息包括的L个比特与所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应，所述配置信息包括的L个比特中的Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值，表示所述第二设备测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述Q个比特一一对应的Q个采样点；所述配置信息包括的L个比特中除了所述Q个比特之外的L-Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第二取值，表示所述第 二设备不测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第一测量信息，所述第一测量信息包括L个比特，所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特与所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应，所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特中的第一比特的取值为第三取值，表示所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第一比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值；所述L个比特中的第二比特的取值为第四取值，表示所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和小于或等于预设值，或者表示所述第二设备没有测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述配置信息包括所述Q个索引，所述Q个索引与所述Q个采样点一一对应。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第二测量信息，所述第二测量信息指示目标索引，所述Q个索引包括所述目标索引，所述每个时域周期中与所述目标索引对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第三测量信息，所述第三测量信息包括第一参考信号的每个时域周期中满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第二设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号内发送的所述第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第二设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
在一些可能的实现方式中，所述其他设备为第三设备，所述方法还包括：
向第三设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
其中，第四方面的描述可以参见第一方面的描述，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
第五方面，本申请提供了一种通信装置，该装置具有实现上述各方面及上述各方面的可能实现方式中各个设备行为的功能。功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。例如，确定模块或单元、收发模块或单元等。
第六方面，本申请提供了一种电子设备，所述装置包括处理器，处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得上述各方面及上述各方面的可能实现方式中的方法被执行。
例如，处理器用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，使得该装置执行上述各方面及上述各方面的可能实现方式中的方法。
可选的，该装置包括的处理器为一个或多个。
可选的，该装置中还可以包括与处理器耦合的存储器。
可选的，该装置包括的存储器可以为一个或多个。
可选的，该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起，或者分离设置。
可选的，该装置中还可以包括收发器。
第七方面，本申请提供了一种电子设备，包括：一个或多个处理器；存储器；以及一个或多个计算机程序。其中，一个或多个计算机程序被存储在存储器中，一个或多个计算机程序包括指令。当指令被电子设备执行时，使得一个或多个处理器执行上述各方面或者各方面的任一项可能的实现中的方法，或者本申请任一实施例所介绍的方法。
可选的，该电子设备还可以包括：触摸显示屏和/或摄像头，其中，触摸显示屏包括触敏表面和显示器。
第八方面，本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，包括计算机指令，当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时，使得电子设备执行上述各方面或者各方面的任一项可能的方法，或者本申请任一实施例所介绍的方法。
第九方面，本申请提供了一种计算机程序产品，当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时，使得电子设备执行上述各面或者各方面的任一项可能的方法，或者本申请任一实施例所介绍的方法。
第十方面，本申请提供一种装置，包含用于执行本申请任一实施例所介绍的方法的单元。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景的示意图。
图2是本申请实施例提供的映射资源元素的示意图。
图3是本申请实施例提供的时域采样点的示意图。
图4是本申请实施例提供的波束发送采样点的示意图。
图5是本申请实施例提供的处理信号的方法示意图。
图6是本申请实施例提供的又一映射资源元素的示意图。
图7是本申请实施例提供的另一处理信号的方法示意图。
图8是本申请实施例提供的另一波束发送采样点的示意图。
图9是本申请实施例提供的又一处理信号的方法示意图。
图10是本申请实施例提供的又一映射资源元素的示意图。
图11是本申请实施例提供的另一时域采样点的示意图。
图12是本申请实施例提供的又一处理信号的方法示意图。
图13是本申请实施例提供的又一映射资源元素的示意图。
图14是本申请实施例提供的又一处理信号的方法示意图。
图15是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications，GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)系统、 通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th generation，5G)系统或新无线(new radio，NR)等或者未来的其他的通信系统。
图1示出了应用于本申请实施例的一种应用场景的示意图。如图1所示，该系统包括：终端设备110和网络设备120。
终端设备110，也称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户通信装置等。
终端设备110可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备，例如，具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前，一些终端设备的举例包括：手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备，虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、无人机，5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请对此并不限定。
网络设备120，也可以称为无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)或者无线接入网设备，网络设备120可以是传输接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)，还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是家庭基站(例如，home evolved NodeB，或home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(base band unit，BBU)，还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备120可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备、无人机、卫星以及5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等，还可以是无线局域网(wireless local area network，WLAN)中的接入点(access point，AP)，还可以是NR系统中的gNB，上述网络设备120还可以是城市基站、微基站、微微基站、毫微微基站等等，本申请对此不做限定。
在一种网络结构中，网络设备120可以包括集中单元(centralized unit，CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit，DU)节点、或是包括CU节点和DU节点的无线接入网络(radio access network，RAN)设备、或者是包括控制面CU节点(CU-CP节点)和用户面CU节点(CU-UP节点)以及DU节点的设备。
应理解，图1仅为便于理解，示意性地示出了终端设备110和网络设备120，但这不应对本申请构成任何限定，该无线通信系统中还可以包括更多数量的网络设备，也可以包 括更多或更少数量的终端设备，本申请对此不做限定。终端设备110可以是固定位置的，也可以是可移动的。
可选地，图1中的网络设备120还可以替换成终端设备，终端设备与终端设备之间传输数据的链路称为侧行链路(sidelink)。侧行链路一般用于车辆对其他设备(vehicle to everything,V2X)，或者室内商用场景中设备到设备(device to device，D2D)等直联通信的场景。例如，室内商用场景中的多个终端设备之间也需要直连通信，如手机需要向VR眼镜传输VR视频；手机需要将播放的画面投影到智慧屏上等。此外，V2X是实现智能汽车、自动驾驶、智能交通运输系统的关键技术。V2X可以包括车到网络(vehicle to network，V2N)、车到车(vehicle to-vehicle，V2V)、车到基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure，V2I)、车到行人(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)的通信等。
下面为了描述方便，省去了设备的编号，例如“终端设备110”可以简化为“终端设备”，“网络设备120”可以简化为“网络设备”。
可选地，图1可以包括更多的终端设备。可选地，在图1包括更多终端设备的情况下，图1也可以不包括网络设备120，即多个终端设备之间的通信可以不需要网络设备的辅助。可选地，在图1包括更多终端设备的情况下，图1也可以包括网络设备，多个终端设备之间的通信可以需要网络设备的辅助。
下面将本申请涉及到的术语进行详细的介绍：
1、波束(beam)
波束可以称为空域滤波器(spatial domain filter)，或者称空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameter)或者空域滤波参数。用于发送信号的波束可以称为发送波束(transmission beam，Tx beam)，可以称为空域发送滤波器(spatial domain transmission filter)或空间发射参数(spatial transmission parameter)；用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam，Rx beam)，可以称为空域接收滤波器(spatial domain receive filter)或空间接收参数(spatial RX parameter)。用于发送信号的波束和用于接收信号的波束可以为同一个波束也可以为不同的波束。
发送波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布，接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。
此外，波束可以是宽波束，或者窄波束，或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术。波束赋形技术具体可以为数字波束赋形技术、模拟波束赋形技术或者混合数字/模拟波束赋形技术等。
可选地，将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口，用于传输数据信道、控制信道和参考信号(如S-SSB，CSI-RS，DMRS)等。形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。
可选地，一个波束对应一个波束的索引，因此可以以波束的索引来唯一标识一个波束。
2、准共址(quasi-colocation)
采样点之间具有准共址关系表示采样点的空域滤波参数相同或者空域滤波器相同或者空间滤波器相同或者空间参数相同或者采样点的收发波束相同。例如，两个采样点具有准共址关系，表示两个采样点的空域滤波参数相同或者空域滤波器相同或者空间滤波器相同或者空间参数相同或者采样点的收发波束相同。
在通信的过程中，为了克服路损，两个设备可以通过定向波束传输信号。因此，在传输信号之前，需要先进行波束训练。传统的波束训练方法中，一个时域符号上只能训练一个波束。则当待训练的波束较多时，训练波束所占的时域资源会变多，导致训练波束的开销较大。为了解决训练波束开销较大这一问题，现有技术利用参考信号的梳状特性，在一个时域符号内训练多个波束，从而减少时域上的开销。然而，为了确保参考信号具备梳状特性，接收参考信号的设备在同一时域符号的其他资源单元(resource element，RE)上不应接收到除用于波束训练的参考信号外的其他信号。这要求该时域符号上除了发送参考信号的RE之外的其他RE上只能采用与待训练波束不相干的波束发送其他信号，或者在其他RE上不发送其他信号。否则接收参考信号的设备会受到其他信号的干扰，导致波束测量不准确。
具体而言，如图2所示，图2中的RE为一个时域符号对应的RE，假设网络设备在图2所示的RE上发送参考信号，终端设备在相应的RE上接收参考信号。其中，参考信号的梳状结构具体表现为：每M个RE中有一个RE用于发送参考信号，参考信号用于测量波束。为保持参考信号在频域的梳状结构，终端设备不应在该时域符号的其他RE上接收到信号，则网络设备需要在该时域符号的其他RE上采用与发送参考信号的波束不相关的波束发送信号，或者在其他RE上不发送信号，从而避免对波束测量造成干扰。将图2所示的参考信号变换到时域，如图3所示，变换之后的时域采样点在一个时域符号内具有时域周期性。因此，终端设备可以在多个时域周期内对不同的波束进行测量，从而实现时域符号内的波束训练。具体而言，图2所示频域上共有L*M个RE，经过傅里叶变换变换到时域上之后，共有M个时域周期，每个时域周期有L个采样点。如图4所示，网络设备可以在M个时域周期中的某一个时域周期内通过一个波束发送L个采样点，不同时域周期的波束不同，图4中不同的波束的填充图案不同，不同波束发送的采样点的填充图案不同，同一波束发送的采样点的填充图案相同，终端设备可以测量某个时域周期内的L个采样点的能量之和，从而实现对波束的测量。
然而，上述现有技术会限制资源调度的灵活性。具体而言，网络设备需要在该时域符号的其他RE上采用与发送参考信号的波束不相关的波束发送信号，或者在其他RE上不发送信号，从而避免对波束测量造成干扰。更进一步地，考虑没有网络设备调度的终端直连通信场景，由于该场景下没有中心调度节点，因此无法保证其他RE上采用的波束与发送参考信号的波束不相干，或者在其他RE上不发送信号，从而会对波束训练造成严重的干扰。为解决上述问题，本申请通过设计空白RE，构造局部正交性，消除其他RE上的干扰。我们将详细介绍本申请中的实施例如下。
在本申请实施例中，第一设备可以在第一时域符号对应的资源元素中的L个资源元素中的P个资源元素上映射将要发送给第二设备的第一参考信号。第一时域符号对应的L个资源元素中除了P个资源元素之外的L-P个资源元素不发送任何信号。其中，第一时域符号对应的L个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔M的整数倍个资源元素。L个资源元素横跨至少两个设备的频域资源，P个资源元素属于第二设备的频域资源，L-P个资源元素属于其他设备的频域资源。第二设备将测量第一参考信号在第一时域符号上的不同的采样点，实现对不同波束的测量，从而进行符号内波束训练，降低资源开销。此外，其他设备的频域资源中除了L-P个不发送任何信号的资源元素之外的资源元素均可以用于传输数据，且 对传输数据的波束没有限制条件。这样可以提高资源调度的灵活性。
下面结合图5描述本申请实施例中用于处理信号的方法500，上述的第一设备可以是方法500中的网络设备，第二设备可以是方法500中的第一终端设备，其他设备可以是方法500中的其他终端设备。如图5所示，方法500包括：
S510，网络设备确定L个资源元素(resource element，RE)中的P个RE。L个RE中任意两个RE间隔M的整数倍个RE，L个RE为第一时域符号对应的频域资源，L个RE横跨至少两个设备的频域资源。P个RE属于第一终端设备的频域资源。其中，M、L和P为正整数，L大于或等于P。
可选地，第一时域符号可以是第一OFDM符号。
可选地，L个RE为第一时域符号对应的频域资源可以理解为：L个RE属于第一时域符号对应的频域资源，或者第一时域符号对应的频域资源包括L个RE。
可选地，L个RE横跨至少两个设备的频域资源可以理解为：L个RE属于至少两个设备的频域资源，或者L个RE位于至少两个设备的频带，或者至少两个设备的频域资源总和包括L个RE。应理解，网络设备在为各个终端设备分配资源的过程中，会为不同的终端设备分配一个带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)的不同频带，不同的终端设备的频域资源总和可以占满一个BWP。
可选地，P个RE属于第一终端设备的频域资源可以理解为：第一终端设备的频域资源包括P个RE，或者P个RE位于第一终端设备的频带，或者第一终端设备的频带包括P个RE。
可选地，第一时域符号可以对应M*L个RE。可选地，L可以理解为第一时域符号对应的频域资源上的频域栅格的数量，一个频域栅格包括M个RE。L个频域栅格中每个频域栅格内的M个RE中的一个RE组成了L个RE，L个RE与L个频域栅格一一对应。
可选地，一个频域栅格可以为一个资源块(resource block，RB)。
例如，L个RE中任意两个RE之间间隔M个RE，或者2M个RE，或者间隔3M个RE等。
可选地，M也可以称为第一梳齿值，第一梳齿值等于一个频域栅格中包括的RE的数量。L个RE中每个RE属于一个频域栅格，L个RE中每个RE在各自的频域栅格中的第一梳齿偏移值相同。例如，如图6所示，L个RE分别为RE 1、RE 2……RE L，L个RE中每个RE在各自的频域栅格中的梳齿偏移值为1。
S520，网络设备在P个RE上映射将要发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号，其中，L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE属于其他终端设备的频域资源，并且不发送任何信号。至少两个设备包括第一终端设备和其他终端设备。
可选地，L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE不发送任何信号可以理解为：网络设备在L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE不映射任何信号，或者，网络设备在L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE映射信号，但是对L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE进行打孔(punctuation)处理。可选地，L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE也可以称为空白RE。
可选地，P个RE中任意两个RE间隔M的正整数倍个RE，例如，间隔M个RE，或者2M个RE，或者间隔3M个RE等。这样，网络设备映射的第一参考信号具有梳状结构，且L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE不发送任何信号。可选地，第一终端设备的频域资 源中P个RE用于映射第一参考信号，第一终端设备的频域资源中除了P个RE之外的RE不映射任何信号。
例如，其他终端设备包括第二终端设备，如图6所示，网络设备确定第一时域符号内的L个RE为RE 1、RE 2、RE 3……RE L。其中，RE 1属于第一个频域栅格，RE 2属于第二个频域栅格，RE3属于第三个频域栅格，RE L属于第L个频域栅格，RE 1与RE 2之间间隔M个RE，RE 2与RE 3之间间隔M个RE，RE 1与RE 3之间间隔2M个RE，以此类推。其中，网络设备将第一个频域栅格和第L个频域栅格分配给第二终端设备，即第一个频域栅格和第L个频域栅格属于第二终端设备的频域资源或者位于第二终端设备的频带。网络设备将第二个频域栅格和第三个频域栅格分配给第一终端设备，即第二个频域栅格和第三个频域栅格属于第一终端设备的频域资源或者位于第一终端设备的频带，网络设备确定的第一终端设备的P个RE包括图6中的RE 2和RE 3，RE 2和RE 3用于映射将要发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号，第一终端设备的第二个频域栅格和第三个频域栅格中除了RE 2和RE 3之外的RE不映射任何信号。RE 1和RE L用于不发送任何信号，网络设备可以利用第一个频域栅格中除了RE 1以外的RE，以及第L频域栅格中除了RE L之外的RE向第二终端设备发送第一信号，且对发送的波束没有限制条件，这样可以提高资源的利用率。
上述方法500中，提供的用于处理信号的方法，网络设备可以在P个RE上映射将要发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号，在L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE上不发送任何信号。这样，网络设备发送的第一参考信号具有梳状结构，第一终端设备可以测量第一参考信号在时域上的不同的采样点实现对不同的波束的测量，从而在一个时域符号内训练多个波束，降低资源开销。此外，网络设备可以利用第二终端设备的频域资源中除了L-P个RE之外的资源元素向第二终端设备发送第一信号，网络设备也无需采用与向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号的波束不相干的波束向第二终端设备发送第一信号。换句话说，网络设备在第二终端设备的频域资源中设置空白RE，并可以在第二终端设备的频域资源上除了空白RE之外的RE上使用与向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号的波束相干的波束或者不相干的波束发送第一信号，从而提高资源调度的灵活性。网络设备按照上述方法500在频域上映射将要向第一终端设备发送的第一参考信号之后，网络设备将在时域上发送第一参考信号对应的时域采样点，下面结合图7的方法700描述网络设备发送第一参考信号对应的采样点，第一终端设备测量第一参考信号对应的采样点的过程。如图7所示，方法700包括：
S710，网络设备在第一时域符号内向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点，每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有准共址(quasi-colocation)关系，i的取值为1至L中的部分正整数。
可选地，方法700中的第一参考信号可以称为参考信号的时域采样点。
可选地，本申请实施例中的时域周期可以替换为采样周期。
可选地，第一终端设备不测量1至L中的i没有取的正整数对应的采样点，其中，第一终端设备不测量的这些采样点对应的时间为网络设备切换波束的时间。
其中，方法700中的M为方法500中的M，方法700中的L为方法500中的L。
可选地，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有准共址关系可以理解为：第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点的空域滤波参数相同，或者第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点的收发波束相同，或者第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点经过了相同的传输信道。如图8所示，图8中共存在M个时域周期，每个时域周期有L个采样点，网络设备采用相同的波束发送每个时域周期中对应的采样点。例如，网络设备采用波束1发送每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点，网络设备采用波束2发送每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点，图8中i的取值可以为1，2，5，6。其中每个时域周期中的第3个采样点和第4个采样点对应的时间为网络设备从波束1切换到波束2所需的时间。
可选地，本申请实施例对网络设备的待训练的波束的数量不作任何限制，网络设备的待训练的波束的数量可以比L多或者比L少或者等于L。在网络设备的待训练的波束的数量比L少的情况下，网络设备可以采用一个波束发送多个采样点。例如，如图8所示，网络设备采用波束1发送每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点，网络设备采用波束2发送每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点。换言之，波束1发送了每个时域周期的两个采样点，共发送了2M个采样点；波束2发送了每个时域周期中的两个采样点，共发送了2M个采样点。在网络设备的待训练的波束的数量大于等于L的情况下，网络设备可以在第一时域符号内通过不多于L个波束发送M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点之后，再在第二时域符号通过剩余的波束发送M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点。
可选地，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有准共址关系，可以包括：第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点和第j个采样点具有准共址关系，j的取值为1至L的正整数，对于一次取值i和j不同。也就是说，第一参考信号的每个时域周期内的采样点之间也具有准共址关系。具有准共址关系的多个采样点可以属于同一个时域周期，也可以属于不同的时域周期，也可以部分属于一个时域周期部分属于不同的时域周期。例如，如图8所示，i＝1，j＝2，表示每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点具有准共址关系，即M个时域周期中同一个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点具有一组准共址关系，M个时域周期中不同时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点也具有该组准共址关系，这样共2M个采样点具有准共址关系。也就是说，2M个采样点的空域滤波参数相同或者这2M个采样点的收发波束相同或者这2M个采样点经过了相同的传输信道。i＝5，j＝6，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点具有另一组准共址关系，即共2M个采样点具有准共址关系，也就是说，这2M个采样点的空域滤波参数相同或者，2M个采样点的收发波束相同或者这2M个采样点经过了相同的传输信道。
可选地，方法700还包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一时域符号。可选地，第二指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号。可选地，第二指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在的帧的帧索引，第一时域符号所在的帧内时隙的时隙索引以及第一时域符号所在时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第二指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在时隙相对于网络设备发送第二指示信息的时隙的时隙偏移以及第一时域符号所在的时隙的符号索引。可选地，网络设备在第一时域符号之前向第一终端设 备发送第二指示信息。
可选地，第二指示信息可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引来指示第一时域符号。本申请实施例对指示第一时域符号的方式不作任何限定。
可选地，网络设备可以配置训练发送波束的时域资源和第一终端设备接收波束的时域资源，若第二指示信息指示的第一时域符号为配置训练发送波束的时域资源，则第一终端设备确定网络设备需要训练发送波束。若第二指示信息指示的第一时域符号为配置训练接收波束的时域资源，则第一终端设备确定网络设备需要训练第一终端设备的接收波束。
可选地，网络设备可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)或者媒体接入控制(medium access control，MAC)控制元素(control element，CE)或者无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)信令向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息。
可选地，方法700还包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送配置信息，配置信息用于指示第一终端设备测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的Q个采样点，Q为小于或等于L的正整数。应理解，此时为网络设备切换发送波束发送第一参考信号对应的采样点，第一终端设备采用固定波束接收采样点的情况。因此，网络设备将向第一终端设备发送配置信息，第一终端设备基于配置信息测量采样点的能量，从而实现对波束的测量。此外，第一终端设备也将测量信息上报给网络设备，网络设备可以根据测量信息在发送波束中确定第一目标波束。下面具体描述配置信息和测量信息。可选地，网络设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第一终端设备发送配置信息。
可以理解的是，网络设备发送第一参考信号对应的采样点的行为具有周期性，即在每个时域周期中网络设备发送第一参考信号对应的采样点的行为都相同。例如，图8中网络设备采用波束1发送每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点，网络设备采用波束2发送每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点。
下面分两种情况描述配置信息。
情况一，配置信息包括L个比特，配置信息包括的L个比特与第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应。L个比特中的Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值，表示第一终端设备测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与Q个比特一一对应的Q个采样点；L个比特中除了Q个比特之外的L-Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第二取值，表示第一终端设备不测量第一参考信号每个时域周期中与L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点。第一终端设备可以测量每个时域周期中与Q个比特一一对应的Q个采样点，不测量每个时域周期中与L-Q个采样点一一对应的L-Q个采样点。可选地，Q个比特中几个连续的比特的取值为第一取值，表示每个时域周期的这几个比特对应的采样点具有准共址关系。例如，第一取值为1，第二取值为0，L个比特中共有Q个比特的取值为1，剩余L-Q个比特的取值为0，且Q个比特中连续几个比特的取值为1表示每个时域周期中的这几个比特对应的采样点具有准共址关系。如图8所示，配置信息包括的L个比特为11001100，此时L为8，第一终端设备测量M个时域周期中每个时域周期中的第1个采样点、第2个采样点、第5个采样点和第6个采样点，不测量每个时域周期中的第3个采样点、第4个采样点、第7个采样点和第8个采样点。每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点具有一组准共址关系，每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点具有另一组准共址关系，每个时域周期中的第3个采样点、第4个采样点、第7个采样点和第8个采样点对应的时间为网 络设备切换波束所需的时间。
也就是说，情况一中，网络设备可以通过位图(bitmap)的方式向第一终端设备指示测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的哪些采样点不测量哪些采样点，且第一终端设备针对每个时域周期中的测量行为都是一致的。
可选地，在情况一中，网络设备可以从第一终端设备接收第一测量信息。第一测量信息包括L个比特，第一测量信息包括的L个比特与第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应。L个比特中的第一比特的取值为第三取值，表示所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与第一比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值；L个比特中的第二比特的取值为第四取值，表示第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与第二比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和小于或等于预设值，或者表示第一终端设备没有测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与第二比特对应的采样点。
可选地，第一测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此网络设备可以从第一终端设备接收指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第一测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第一测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
需要说明的是，配置信息中取值为第一取值的数量Q大于或等于第一测量信息中取值为第三取值的比特的数量。也就是说，网络设备配置第一终端设备测量采样点的数量大于或等于第一终端设备上报的采样点的数量，例如，Q为4，第一测量信息中取值为第三取值的比特数量为2。如图8所示，配置信息包括的L个比特为11001100，表示第一终端设备需要测量每个时域周期中的4个采样点，分别为第1个采样点、第2个采样点、第5个采样点和第6个采样点。第一终端设备根据每个时域周期中的第1采样点和第2个采样点的能量之和确定波束1的能量，根据每个时域周期中第5个采样点的能量和第6个采样点的能量之和确定波束2的能量。第一终端设备确定波束1的能量大于预设值，因此，第一终端设备可以上报的第一测量信息包括的L个比特可以为11000000，网络设备可以根据11000000确定第一目标波束为波束1。
可选地，预设值可以为预配置的值或者是网络设备配置给第一终端设备的值。
可选地，网络设备确定的配置信息与网络设备使用的波束相关。具体地，若网络设备使用一个波束发送了第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的多个采样点，则配置信息中该多个采样点对应的比特的取值相同，都为第一取值。此时，第一终端设备需测量每个周期的该多个采样点，才能实现对相应波束的测量。若网络设备使用一个波束发送了第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的一个采样点，则配置信息中该采样点对应的比特的取值为第一取值。举例来说，如图8所示，网络设备使用波束1发送第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的采样点1和采样点2，使用波束2发送第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的采样点5和采样点6，则配置信息中的L个比特的取值为11001100。
可选地，第三取值与第四取值不同，第一取值与第二取值不同，但是第三取值可以与第一取值相同或者不同，或者第四取值可以与第二取值相同或者不同。例如，第三取值为1，第四取值为0。
可选地，网络设备接收到第一测量信息之后，可以根据第一测量信息确定第一目标波 束，网络设备可以采用第一目标波束向第一终端设备发送数据。
可选地，网络设备根据第一测量信息确定第一目标波束，包括：网络设备将第一测量信息中取值为第三取值的第一比特的采样点对应的波束确定为候选波束，并在候选波束中确定第一目标波束。可选地，网络设备在候选波束中确定第一目标波束，包括：网络设备将候选波束中的任意一个波束确定为第一目标波束。例如，结合图8的例子，第一终端设备上报的第一测量信息包括的L个比特可以为11001100，则网络设备将发送第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点的波束1以及发送第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点的波束2确定为候选波束。网络设备可以将这两个波束中的任意一个波束作为第一目标波束。又例如，结合图8中的例子，配置信息包括的L个比特为1100110000，第一测量信息包括的L个比特为1100000000，则网络设备将发送第1个采样点和第2个采样点的波束1确定为第一目标波束。
可选地，满足准共址关系的采样点可以是同一时域周期的采样点，还可以是不同时域周期的采样点，第一终端设备需要测量所有满足准共址关系的采样点，来确定采样点的能量之和，从而测量波束的质量。例如，如图8所示，第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点具有准共址关系，第一终端设备需要测量每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点，计算这2M个采样点的能量和。若这2M个采样点的能量之和大于预设值，则第一测量信息中与第1个采样点对应的第1个比特的取值为第三取值，与第2个采样点对应的第2个比特的取值为第三取值，例如第一测量信息包括的L个比特为11000000。
可选地，在情况一中，网络设备可以从第一终端设备接收第三测量信息，第三测量信息包括第一参考信号的每个时域周期满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。网络设备根据第三测量信息包括的第一参考信号的每个时域周期满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和确定第一目标波束。可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信息可以包括根据H组准共址关系的采样点得到的H个能量之和。其中，一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和。这样，网络设备可以在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，该最大的能量之和对应了一组目标准共址关系，发送具有该组目标准共址关系的采样点的波束为第一目标波束。例如，配置信息包括的L个比特为11001100，第一终端设备确定共有两组准共址关系，分别为每个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点对应的第一组准共址关系，以及每个时域周期的第5个采样点和第6个采样点对应第二组准共址关系。第一终端设备测量每个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点的能量得到第一组准共址关系对应的能量之和A1，第一终端设备测量每个时域周期的第5个采样点和第6个采样点得到第二组准共址关系对应的能量之和A2。第一终端设备可以上报A1和A2。若A1大于A2，则网络设备确定发送每个时域周期的采样点1和采样点2的波束1为第一目标波束，若A1小于A2，则网络设备确定发送每个时域周期的采样点5和采样点6的波束2为第一目标波束。可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信号可以包括F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和，且有F小于等于H。其中，一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和，F个能量之和为H个能量之和中大于预设值的能量之和，F为小于或等于H的正整数。换句话说，第二设备可以直接上报测量得到的每组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和或者上报能量之和大于预设值的F组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。可选地，本申请实施例中的采样点的能量之和可以为采样点 的归一化能量之和。
可选地，第三测量信息中F个比特位置与F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和一一对应，第一终端设备测量F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和后，在第三测量信息的F个比特位置上分别承载F个能量之和。F个比特位置与F组准共址关系一一对应。网络设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据F个比特位置确定与F组准共址关系一一对应的F个能量之和，从而在F个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息中H个比特位置与H个能量之和一一对应，第三测量信息的H个比特位置上分别承载H个能量之和。H个比特位置与H组准共址关系一一对应。网络设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据H个比特位置确定与H组准共址关系一一对应的H个能量之和，从而在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此网络设备可以从第一终端设备接收指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第三测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第三测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
情况二，配置信息包括Q个索引，Q个索引与Q个采样点一一对应。第一终端设备根据Q个索引确定Q个采样点，并测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的Q个采样点。例如，若网络设备配置第一终端设备测量图8中的每个时域周期中的第1个采样点、第2个采样点、第5个采样点和第6个采样点，则配置信息包括4个索引，分别是0，1，4，5。其中，0为第1个采样点的索引，1为第2个采样点的索引，4为第5个采样点的索引，5为第6个采样点的索引。可选地，连续的索引可以表示这些索引对应的采样点是通过一个波束发送的，即这些索引对应的采样点具备准共址关系。例如，配置信息包括0，1，4，5，表示网络设备通过一个波束发送了每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点，通过另一个波束发送了每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点。
可选地，Q个索引可以是1到L之间的编号，或者也可以是0到L-1之间编号，或者也可以是其他的编号，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
可选地，在情况二中，第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二测量信息，第二测量信息指示目标索引，Q个索引包括目标索引，第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与目标索引对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。目标索引可以包括一个或多个。可选地，第二测量信息可以直接指示目标索引也可以间接指示目标索引，例如第二测量信息可以指示目标索引的区间段。例如，配置信息包括Q个索引为0，1，2，由于0，1，2分别为每个时域周期中连续的第1个采样点，第2个采样点和第3个采样点的索引，因此，每个时域周期中的第1个采样点，第2个采样点和第3个采样点具有准共址关系，第一终端设备确定第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的第1个采样点、第2个采样点和第3个采样点的能量之和大于预设值，则第二测量信息可以为0，2，0，2表示每个时域周期中索引为0的采样点至索引为2的采样点的能量之和大于预设值，如第1个采样点、第2个采样点和第3个采样点的能量之和大于预设值。
可选地，预设值可以为预配置或者是网络设备配置给第一终端设备的值。情况一与情况二中的预设值可以相同或者不同，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
可选地，第二测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此网络设备可以从第一终端设备接收指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第二测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第二测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
可选地，网络设备确定的配置信息包括的Q个索引与网络设备使用的波束相关。具体地，若网络设备使用一个波束发送了第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的多个采样点，则配置信息包括该多个采样点的索引。换句话说，网络设备使用一个波束发送多个采样点，则第一终端设备需测量该多个采样点，才能实现对该发送波束的测量；若网络设备使用一个波束发送了第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的一个采样点，则配置信息中的Q个索引可以依据网络设备的实现确定。
可选地，在网络设备需要向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息和配置信息的情况下，网络设备可以向第一终端设备同时发送第二指示信息和配置信息，也可以分别向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息和配置信息，本申请实施例对发送第二指示信息和配置信息的顺序没有任何限制。可以理解的是，网络设备可以在第一时域符号之前向第一终端设备发送第二指示信息和配置信息。
可选地，在情况二中，网络设备可以从第一终端设备接收第三测量信息，第三测量信息包括满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。网络设备根据第三测量信息包括的满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和确定第一目标波束。可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信息可以包括H组准共址关系的采样点得到的H个能量之和，其中一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和。这样，网络设备可以在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，最大的能量之和对应一组目标准共址关系，发送具有该组目标准共址关系的采样点的波束为第一目标波束。例如，配置信息包括的4个索引分别为0，1，4，5，由于索引0，1为连续的两个索引，4，5为连续的两个索引，第一终端设备确定共有两组准共址关系，分别为每个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点对应第一组准共址关系，每个时域周期的第5个采样点和第6个采样点对应第二组准共址关系。第一终端设备测量每个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点的能量得到第一组准共址关系对应的能量之和A1，第一终端设备测量每个时域周期的第5个采样点和第6个采样点得到第二组准共址关系对应的能量之和A2。第一终端设备可以上报A1和A2，若A1大于A2，则网络设备确定发送每个时域周期的采样点1和采样点2的波束1为第一目标波束；若A1小于A2，则网络设备确定发送每个时域周期的采样点5和采样点6的波束2为第一目标波束。可选地，若共有H组准共址关系，第三测量信息可以包括F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和。其中一组准共址关系对应一个能量之和，F个能量之和为H个能量之和中大于预设值的能量之和，F为小于或等于H的正整数。换句话说，第二设备可以直接上报测量得到的每组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和或者上报能量之和大于预设值的F组准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
可选地，第三测量信息中F个比特位置与F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和一一对应，第一终端设备测量F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和后，在第三 测量信息的F个比特位置上分别承载F个能量之和。F个比特位置与F组准共址关系一一对应。网络设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据F个比特位置确定与F组准共址关系一一对应的F个能量之和，从而在F个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息中H个比特位置与H个能量之和一一对应，第三测量信息的H个比特位置上分别承载H个能量之和。H个比特位置与H组准共址关系一一对应。网络设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据H个比特位置确定与H组准共址关系一一对应的H个能量之和，从而在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此网络设备可以从第一终端设备接收指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第三测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第三测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
S720，网络设备在第一时域符号上向第二终端设备发送第一信号，第一信号的M个时域周期对应M*L个采样点，第一信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点。
其中，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列正交。换言之，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列的长度与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列长度相等，且第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列内积为零。
在方法700中，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列正交。这样，在上述采样点上，网络设备向第一终端设备发送的第一参考信号与向第二终端设备发送的第一信号互不干扰，从而可以使得第一终端设备测量得到的第一参考信号的能量中不会有第一信号的能量，使第一终端设备测量第一参考信号的能量比较准确，从而可以提高训练波束的准确性。
可选地，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点和第j个采样点组成的序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点和第j个采样点组成的序列正交。例如i＝1，j＝2，表示第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点组成长度为2M的序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点组成长度为2M的序列正交。换言之，第一参考信号的采样点组成的序列与第一信号相对应的采样点组成的序列正交，互相正交的两个序列可以是每个时域周期中的一个采样点组成的序列也可以是每个时域周期中两个及以上的采样点组成的序列。互相正交的两个序列的长度相同，且组成每个序列的采样点为每个时域周期中相同位置的采样点。可选地，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点和第j个采样点具有准共址关系的情况下，第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点和第j个采样点组成的序列与第一信号 的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点和第j个采样点组成的序列正交。
在方法500与方法700可以结合的情况下，L个RE横跨至少两个终端设备的频带。方法500中L个RE中P个RE用于映射S710中发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号，P个RE位于第一终端设备的频带。方法500的L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE位于其他终端设备的频带，且不发送任何信号。其他终端设备包括第二终端设备。网络设备可以在其他终端设备的频带中除了L-P个RE之外的RE映射第一信号，其中，L-P个RE为L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE。通过这种设计，可以使得第一参考信号在时域上的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列正交。
可选地，第一序列包括第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列。
可选地，第一信号可以是数据或者是信令，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
可选地，第一参考信号的M个时域周期与第一信号的M个时域周期之间的关系可以为：第一参考信号的时域周期与第一信号的时域周期的数量相同，都为M个；第一参考信号的一个时域周期中的采样点的数量与第一信号的一个时域周期中的采样点的数量相同，都为L个，但是第一参考信号的一个时域周期中的采样点与第一信号的一个时域周期中的采样点不同。
可选地，在方法500可以与方法700结合的情况下，网络设备向第二终端设备发送第一信号，包括：网络设备在第二终端设备的频域资源中除了L-P个RE之外的RE上向第二终端设备发送第一信号，L-P个RE为L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE。
可选地，方法700还包括：网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息，第二终端设备可以接收第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示第一时域符号。可选地，网络设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息。第二终端设备可以根据第三指示信息解调第一信号。可选地，第三指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在的帧的帧索引，第一时域符号所在的帧内的时隙的时隙索引以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第三指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在时隙相对于网络设备发送第三指示信息的时隙的时隙偏移以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可以理解的是，网络设备可以先向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息，再向第二终端设备发送第一信号。
可选地，在方法500可以与方法700结合的情况下，方法700还可以包括：网络设备向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息，第二终端设备接收第四指示信息，第四指示信息用于指示L个RE对应的频域的第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值。第一梳齿偏移值的取值范围为0至M-1。可选地，网络设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息。第二终端设备根据第四指示信息指示的第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值确定L个RE的频域位置，并在L个RE中将属于第二终端设备的频带的L-P个RE设为空白RE，根据空白RE解调第一信号。换言之，第二终端设备需要确定哪些RE是空白RE，并在解调第一信号的时候，根据空白RE解调第一信号。
可以理解的是，网络设备向第二终端设备发送第一信号和第四指示信息的顺序没有任何限制，网络设备可以同时向第二终端设备发送第一信号和第四指示信息，也可以按照先 后顺序发送第一信号和第四指示信息。
可选地，在网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息和第四指示信息的情况下，第二终端设备根据第三指示信息和第四指示信息确定L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE，并根据确定的RE解调第一信号。可选地，第二终端设备根据第三指示信息和第四指示信息确定L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE，包括：第二终端设备根据第三指示信息确定第一时域符号，第二终端设备根据第四指示信息在第二终端设备的频带中确定第一时域符号内位于第二终端设备频带上的L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE，并将这些RE设为空白RE。若网络设备向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息和第一信号，则发送第四指示信息和第一信号的顺序也没有任何限制。
可选地，在方法500可以与方法700结合的情况下，方法700还包括：网络设备向第二终端设备发送第五指示信息，第五指示信息用于指示L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE上不映射信号或者在L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE上进行打孔。第二终端设备可以根据第五指示信息解调第一信号，可选地，网络设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令向第二终端设备发送第五指示信息。换句话说，网络设备需要向第二终端设备指示L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE上不发送信号的实现方式，这样第二终端设备可以根据L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE上不发送信号的实现方式解调来自网络设备的第一信号。可选地，在网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息和第五指示信息的情况下，第二终端设备根据第三指示信息和第五指示信息解调第一信号。可选地，第二终端设备根据第三指示信息和第五指示信息解调第一信号，包括：第二终端设备根据第三指示信息确定第一时域符号，根据第五指示信息确定第一时域符号上不发送信号的RE的实现方式，从而解调第一时域符号内的第一信号。可选地，在网络设备向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息和第五指示信息的情况下，第二终端设备根据第四指示信息和第五指示信息解调第一信号。可选地，第二终端设备根据第四指示信息和第五指示信息解调第一信号，包括：第二终端设备可以根据第四指示信息在指示的第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值在L个RE中确定属于第二终端设备的频带的L-P个资源元素，并根据第五指示信息确定L-P个RE上不发送信号的实现方式，从而解调发送给第二终端设备的第一信号。可选地，在网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三指示信息、第四指示信息和第五指示信息的情况下，第二终端设备根据第三指示信息、第四指示信息和第五指示信息解调第一信号。可选地，第二终端设备根据第三指示信息、第四指示信息和第五指示信息解调第一信号，包括：第二终端设备根据第三指示信息确定第一时域符号，根据第四指示信息和第二终端设备的频带确定第一时域符号内的L个RE中除了P个RE之外的L-P个RE，根据第五指示信息确定L个RE中除了P个RE之外的L-P个RE上不发送信号的实现方式，从而解调第一信号。
可以理解的是，网络设备向第二终端设备发送第一信号和第五指示信息的顺序没有任何限制，网络设备可以同时向第二终端设备发送第一信号和第五指示信息，也可以按照先后顺序发送第一信号和第五指示信息。若网络设备向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息和第五指示信息，则发送第四指示信息和第五指示信息的顺序也没有任何限制。若网络设备向第二终端设备发送第四指示信息和第五指示信息，网络设备可以向第二终端设备发送第一消息，第一消息的第一信息位用于承载第四指示信息，第一消息的第二信息位用于承载第五指示信息。
可选地，在S710之前，方法700还包括：网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系。这样，第一终端设备可以根据第一指示信息执行方法900。例如，本申请实施例中的图8波束发送采样点的方式可以称之为“交织的符号内波束训练”的方式，图4所示的发送采样点的方式可以称之为“周期的符号内波束训练”的方式，图4中同一时域周期内的采样点具有准共址关系，网络设备采用同一波束发送同一时域周期的不同采样点。这样，第一终端设备需要测量一个时域周期内采样点的能量之和，即可确定一个波束的质量。图8中的交织的符号内波束训练，第一终端设备需要测量每个时域周期中具有准共址关系的采样点的能量之和，从而确定发送具有准共址关系的采样点的波束的质量。如第一指示信息对应的比特取值为1，表示波束发送采样点的方式为“交织的符号内波束训练”的方式，因此，第一终端设备根据方法900测量波束的能量，若第一指示信息对应的比特的取值为0，表示波束发送采样点的方式为“周期的符号内波束训练”的方式，第一终端设备根据图4所示的方法发送采样点的方式测量一个时域周期内采样点的能量之和，即可确定一个波束的质量。
可选地，网络设备可以根据当前的发送行为确定第一指示信息。例如，网络设备确定在第一时域符号内向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号的行为与网络设备向其他终端设备发送第一信号的行为时分的情况下，或者网络设备向第二终端设备发送第一信号的波束与网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号的波束不相关的情况下，网络设备确定的第一指示信息可以指示“周期的符号内波束训练”，否则第一指示信息指示“交织的符号内波束训练”。其他终端设备包括第二终端设备。
可选地，网络设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者无线资源控制RRC信令向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息。
可选地，在网络设备需要向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息、第二指示信息和配置信息的情况下，网络设备可以向第一终端设备同时发送第一指示信息、第二指示信息和配置信息，也可以分别向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息、第二指示信息和配置信息，本申请实施例对发送第一指示信息、第二指示信息和配置信息的顺序没有任何限制。若网络设备向第一终端设备同时发送第一指示信息、第二指示信息和配置信息，则网络设备可以在第一时域符号之前向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息、第二指示信息和配置信息。
需要理解的是，方法700也可以不存在S720，即网络设备不向第二终端设备发送第一信号，默认没有发送第一信号。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中以其他终端设备是第二终端设备为例，网络设备向第二终端设备发送第一信号。对于网络设备向除了第二终端设备之外的终端设备发送其他信号的行为可以参见网络设备向第二终端设备发送第一信号的行为。
也需要说明的是，方法700可以是不依赖于方法500的独立的实施例，此时方法700是网络设备向第一终端设备和第二终端设备发送时域采样点的实施例。方法700也可以是依赖于方法500的实施例，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
上述方法700描述网络设备分别向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号和向第二终端设备发送第一信号，对于第一终端设备而言可能会接收到第一参考信号和第一信号混合的第二信号。下面结合方法900描述第一终端设备处理信号的过程，如图9所示，方法900包括：
S910，第一终端设备在第一时域符号上接收来自第一设备的第二信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，第二信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点。
可选地，第二信号包括网络设备发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号和网络设备发送给第二终端设备的第一信号。换言之，第一终端设备不仅可以接收到网络设备发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号，也能接收到网络设备发送给第二终端设备的第一信号。从第一终端设备的角度而言，称为第一终端设备在第一时域符号上接收到第二信号。在进行接收处理之前，第一终端设备无法分别感知第二信号中的第一信号和第一参考信号。
可选地，S910，包括：终端设备采用固定的波束在第一时域符号内从网络设备接收第二信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点。换言之，在测量网络设备的发送波束的过程中，终端设备采用固定的波束接收采样点，这样可以使得测量的网络设备的发送波束更准确。
可选地，在S910之前，第一终端设备从网络设备接收第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一时域符号。第一终端设备可以根据第二指示信息确定进行符号内波束训练的第一时域符号。可选地，第二指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号。可选地，第二指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在的帧的帧索引，第一时域符号所在的帧内的时隙的时隙索引以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第二指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在时隙相对于网络设备发送第二指示信息的时隙的时隙偏移以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第一终端设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令接收第二指示信息。
可选地，第二指示信息可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引来指示第一时域符号。本申请实施例对指示第一时域符号的方式不作任何限定。
可选地，网络设备可以配置训练发送波束的时域资源和训练第一终端设备接收波束的时域资源。若第二指示信息指示的第一时域符号为训练发送波束的时域资源，则第一终端设备确定网络设备需要训练发送波束。此时，第一终端设备可以执行S920。
S920，第一终端设备根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量。其中，第一序列包括第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列，第二序列包括第一终端设备本地的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中L个采样点中第i个采样点组成的序列，i的取值为1至L中的部分正整数。
可选地，第二序列与第三序列正交，第三序列包括第二信号中的第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列。由于第二序列与第三序列正交，因此，第一终端设备确定的第一序列与第二序列内积，能够去除第二信号中第一信号对发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号的干扰。这样，第一终端设备就可以通过测量第二信号中的第一参考信号从而实现对网络设备发送的波束进行测量。
可选地，第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点是网络设备配置的第一终端设备待测量的采样点。换句话说，即使第二信号的每个时域周期包括L个采样点，网络设备可以配置第一终端设备测量每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的部分采样点。例如，第一终端设备可以接收来自网络设备的配置信息，配置信息用于指示第一终端设备测量第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的Q个采样点，Q为小于或等于L的正整数。可选地，第一终端设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令接收配置信 息。与方法700中的网络设备发送配置信息的方式类似，第一终端设备可以根据配置信息进行测量。可选地，第一终端设备可以根据配置信息确定共存在几组准共址关系，第一终端设备针对每组准共址关系生成不同的本地第一参考信号的第二序列，并根据每组准共址关系对应的采样点组成的第一序列与本地生成的第一参考信号的第二序列确定每组准共址关系对应的采样点的能量之和，并上报测量信息。下面也分两种情况讨论第一终端设备根据方法700中的网络设备发送的配置信息测量采样点的方式。
需要说明的是，配置信息配置第一终端设备测量第一参考信号，但是对于第一终端设备而言接收到的是第二信号。第一终端设备根据配置信息测量第一参考信号，实际是根据配置信息测量接收到的第二信号。因此，也可以理解为第一终端设备根据配置信息测量第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的Q个采样点，Q个采样点包括S920中的第i采样点。下面描述第一终端设备测量第二信号。
情况一，与方法700的情况一对应，配置信息包括L个比特。方法900中的情况一的配置信息与方法700中的情况一的配置信息相同，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
在情况一中，第一终端设备接收到配置信息之后，确定配置信息共配置了几组准共址关系的采样点，并根据配置信息生成每组准共址关系对应的本地的第一参考信号对应的若干条第二序列。此外，第一终端设备还将确定第二信号的每个时域周期中每组准共址关系对应的采样点组成的若干条第一序列。第一终端设备可以计算每组准共址关系对应的第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定每组准共址关系中的采样点的能量之和，并上报测量信息。例如，第一序列包括第二信号的每个时域周期对应的Q个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列，第二序列包括第一终端设备本地的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的Q个采样点中的第i个采样点。举例来说，配置信息包括的L个比特为11001100，L为8，Q为4。第一终端设备接收到配置信息之后确定共有两组准共址关系，第一组准共址关系为第二信号的每个时域周期中第1个采样点和第2个采样点，第二组准共址关系为第二信号的每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点。其中第二信号的每个时域周期中的第3个采样点、第4个采样点、第7个采样点和第8个采样点对应的时间为网络设备切换波束所需的时间，第一终端设备不测量这些采样点。第一终端设备根据本地的第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点生成第一组准共址关系对应的序列1，根据本地的第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第5个采样点和第6个采样点生成第二组准共址关系对应的序列2。第一终端设备根据第二信号的每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点生成序列3，第一终端设备根据第二信号的每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点生成序列4。第一终端设备利用序列1与序列3的内积再除以序列1与序列1的内积得到第一组准共址关系对应的能量之和A1，第一终端设备利用序列2与序列4的内积再除以序列2与序列2的内积得到第二组准共址关系对应的能量之和A2。其中能量之和A1表征了网络设备发送第一组准共址关系的采样点的波束的质量，能量之和A2表征了网络设备发送第二组准共址关系的采样点的波束的质量。
可选地，第一终端设备确定每组准共址关系对应的能量之后，向网络设备发送第一时域符号对应的第一测量信息。第一测量信息包括L个比特，第一测量信息包括的L个比特与第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应。第一终端设备在每组准共址关系对应的能量中确定能量之和大于预设值的目标准共址关系，并将第一测量信息包括的 L个比特中目标准共址关系对应的采样点对应的比特设置为第三取值；第一终端设备将第一测量信息包括的L个比特中其余采样点对应的比特设置为第四取值。结合上述的举例，若能量之和A1大于预设值，能量之和A2小于预设值，则第一测量信息包括的L个比特为11000000。
可选地，第一测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第一终端设备可以向网络设备发送指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第一测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第一测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
可选地，第一终端设备确定每组准共址关系对应的能量之后，向网络设备发送第三测量信息，第三测量信息包括每组准共址关系对应的能量。结合上述的举例，第三测量信息包括能量之和A1和能量之和A2。
可选地，第三测量信息中F个比特位置与F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和一一对应，第一终端设备测量F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和后，在第三测量信息的F个比特位置上分别承载F个能量之和。F个比特位置与F组准共址关系一一对应。网络设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据F个比特位置确定与F组准共址关系一一对应的F个能量之和，从而在F个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息中H个比特位置与H个能量之和一一对应，第三测量信息的H个比特位置上分别承载H个能量之和。H个比特位置与H组准共址关系一一对应。网络设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据H个比特位置确定与H组准共址关系一一对应的H个能量之和，从而在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第一终端设备可以向网络设备发送指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第三测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第三测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
情况二，与方法700的情况二对应，配置信息包括Q个索引，Q个索引与Q个采样点一一对应。方法900中的情况二中的配置信息与方法700中的情况二中的配置信息相同，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
在情况二中，第一终端设备接收到配置信息之后，确定配置信息共配置了几组准共址关系的采样点，并根据配置信息生成每组准共址关系对应的本地的第一参考信号对应的若干条第二序列。此外，第一终端设备还将确定第二信号的每个时域周期中每组准共址关系对应的采样点组成的若干条第一序列。第一终端设备可以确定每组准共址关系对应的第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定每组准共址关系中的采样点的能量之和，并上报测量信息。例如，第一序列包括第二信号的每个时域周期中Q个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列，第二序列包括第一终端设备本地的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期中Q个采样点中第i个采样点。举例来说，配置信息包括的Q个索引为0,1,4,5，Q为4。其中，0 表示第一终端设备测量每个时域周期中的第1个采样点，1表示第一终端设备测量每个时域周期中的第2个采样点，4表示第一终端设备测量每个时域周期中的第5个采样点，5表示第一终端设备测量每个时域周期中的第6个采样点。由于索引0,1为连续的，索引4,5为连续的，因此第一终端设备确定共有两组准共址关系。第一组准共址关系为第二信号的每个时域周期中第1个采样点和第2个采样点，第二组准共址关系为第二信号的每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点。第一终端设备根据本地的第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第1个采样点和第2个采样点生成第一组准共址关系对应的序列1，根据本地的第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第5个采样点和第6个采样点生成第二组准共址关系对应的序列2。第一终端设备根据第二信号的每个时域周期中的第1个采样点和第2个采样点生成序列3，第一终端设备根据第二信号的每个时域周期中的第5个采样点和第6个采样点生成序列4。第一终端设备利用序列1与序列3的内积再除以序列1与序列1的内积得到第一组准共址关系对应的能量之和A1，第一终端设备利用序列2与序列4的内积的再除以序列2与序列1的内积得到第二组准共址关系对应的能量之和A2。其中能量之和A1表示网络设备发送第一组准共址关系的采样点的波束的质量，能量之和A2表示网络设备发送第二组准共址关系的采样点的波束的质量。
可选地，第一终端设备确定每组准共址关系对应的能量之和之后，确定能量之和大于预设值的一组或者多组准共址关系，并向网络设备发送第二测量信息。第二测量信息指示目标索引，Q个索引包括目标索引，与目标索引指示的采样点具有准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。目标索引可以包括一个或多个。可选地，第二测量信息可以直接指示目标索引也可以间接指示目标索引，例如第二测量信息可以指示目标索引的区间段。结合上述的举例，若能量之和A1大于预设值，能量之和A2小于预设值，则第二测量信息指示的Q个索引为0,1，第二测量信息可以直接指示0,1或者指示0-1，0-1表示索引0对应的采样点与索引1对应的采样点之间所有的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。
可选地，第二测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第一终端设备可以向网络设备发送指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第二测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第二测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
可选地，第一终端设备确定第二信号中的第一参考信号的每组准共址关系对应的能量之后，向网络设备发送第三测量信息。第三测量信息包括每组准共址关系对应的能量。结合上述的举例，第三测量信息包括能量之和A1和能量之和A2。
可选地，第三测量信息中F个比特位置与F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和一一对应，第一终端设备测量F组准共址关系的采样点得到的F个能量之和后，在第三测量信息的F个比特位置上分别承载F个能量之和。F个比特位置与F组准共址关系一一对应。网络设备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据F个比特位置确定与F组准共址关系一一对应的F个能量之和，从而在F个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息中H个比特位置与H个能量之和一一对应，第三测量信息的H个比特位置上分别承载H个能量之和。H个比特位置与H组准共址关系一一对应。网络设 备接收到第三测量信息之后，根据H个比特位置确定与H组准共址关系一一对应的H个能量之和，从而在H个能量之和中确定最大的能量之和，发送该组最大的能量之和对应的采样点的波束即为第一目标波束。
可选地，第三测量信息可以为第一终端设备在第一时域符号内测量得到的信息，因此第一终端设备可以向网络设备发送指示第一时域符号的指示信息以及第三测量信息。这样，网络设备可以根据指示信息确定第三测量信息为第一时域符号内的测量信息。可选地，指示信息可以直接指示第一时域符号，或者可以通过指示第一参考信号的资源索引指示第一时域符号。
需要理解的是，第一终端设备在确定第二信号中第一参考信号的能量的过程中，第一终端设备能够获知网络设备发送的第一参考信号。也就是说，第一终端设备在本地保存有第一参考信号。第一终端设备接收到第二信号之后，利用包括第二信号的每个时域周期的第i个采样点的序列与本地保存的包括第一参考信号的每个时域周期的第i个采样点的序列进行内积，可以消除第一信号对第一参考信号的干扰，从而可以使得第一终端设备确定的第一参考信号的能量比较准确。
需要说明的是，在方法500与方法900可以结合的情况下，方法500中L个RE中P个RE用于映射第一参考信号，方法500的L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE不发送信号。网络设备可以在其他终端设备的频带中除了上述L-P个RE之外的RE映射第一信号，其中，L-P个RE为L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE，其他终端设备包括第二终端设备。通过这种设计，可以使得第一参考信号在时域上的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的第二序列与第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的第三序列正交。但是在实际处理过程中，第一终端设备并没有感知第三序列。
为了理解方案，下面结合图10描述第二序列与第三序列正交。如图10所示，按照方法500中的设计，网络设备在第一终端设备的频带上每间隔M个RE上映射了第一参考信号，如图11中的RE 2和RE 3。网络设备在第二终端设备的频带上每间隔M个RE上设置空白RE，例如RE 1和RE L。网络设备在第二终端设备的频带上除了空白RE之外的RE向第二终端设备发送第一信号。第一终端设备既可以收到网络设备向第一终端设备发送的第一参考信号rf，也可以接收到网络设备向第二终端设备发送的第一信号df。因此，在数学上，第一终端设备接收到的频域上的第二信号sf可以分解为第一信号df和第一参考信号rf，即sf＝df+rf，也就是说，第二信号为第一信号和第一参考信号加起来的信号。其中rf可以理解为网络设备发送给第一终端设备的频域的第一参考信号组成的序列，rf在第二终端设备的频带对应的RE位置补零。df可以理解为网络设备发送给第二终端设备的频域的第一信号组成的序列，df在第一终端设备的频带的对应的RE位置补零。这样，相当于第一终端设备接收到了频域的第一信号和第一参考信号叠加后的第二信号sf。在频域上，df、rf和sf的长度都相同，例如为N，相当于第一终端设备的频带和第二终端设备的频带共占N个子载波。L＝N/M，即共存在L个频域栅格。将频域的序列sf、df和rf变换到时域之后，得到时域的序列分别为st、dt和rt，其中，st＝dt+rt，st可以为前述的第一序列，rt可以为前述的第二序列，dt可以为前述的第三序列。根据傅里叶变换的性质，可以得到其中i为满足0≤i≤L的任意一个整数。上述公式表明，rt与dt具有正交性，即第二序列与第三序列正交。如图11所示，第一终端设备的本 地的频域的第一参考信号rf变换到时域为rt，频域的第一信号df变换到时域为dt，频域的第二信号sf变换到时域为st。第一终端设备提取本地的时域的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中的第i个采样点组成的序列为第二序列rt(mL+i)，第一终端设备提取接收到的第二信号的每个时域周期中的第i个采样点组成的序列为第一序列，第一终端设备对第一序列和第二序列进行内积运算：第一终端设备根据第一序列和第二序列进行内积运算的结果确定第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量，这样，第一终端设备可以消除第一信号的每个时域周期中的第i个样点组成的第三序列dt(mL+i)对第一参考信号的能量的影响，从而使波束的测量更加准确。
可选地，在S920之前，方法900还包括：第一终端设备从网络设备接收第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系。可选地，第一终端设备可以通过DCI或者MAC CE或者RRC信令接收第一指示信息。这样，第一终端设备可以根据第一指示信息执行方法900本申请实施例中的方法。例如，本申请实施例中的图8波束发送采样点的方式可以称之为“交织的符号内波束训练”的方式，图4波束发送采样点的方式可以称之为“周期的符号内波束训练”的方式，如第一指示信息对应的比特取值为1，表示波束发送采样点的方式为“交织的符号内波束训练”的方式，则第一终端设备根据方法900测量波束的能量，若第一指示信息对应的比特的取值为0表示波束发送采样点的方式为“周期的符号内波束训练”的方式，第一终端设备根据图4所示的发送采样点的方式测量一个时域周期内采样点的能量之和，即可确定一个波束的质量。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中以第一终端设备和第二终端设备为例描述，第一终端设备是接收网络设备发送的第一参考信号的终端设备，第二终端设备是接收网络设备发送的第一信号的终端设备。网络设备需要在第一终端设备的频带或者频域资源中确定P个RE，在第二终端设备的频带或者频域资源中确定L-P个空白RE，在L-P个RE上不向第二终端设备发送任何信号。实际应用中，网络设备可以向更多的终端设备(例如G个终端设备，G为正整数)发送不同的信号，向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号。第一时域符号对应的L个频域栅格，每个频域栅格包括M个RE，网络设备在不同终端设备的频带或者频域资源中设置相应的空白RE，例如在F个终端设备的频带或者频域资源上分别设置的空白RE为P1个RE，P2个RE……，PF个RE，其中，P1+P2+……+PF+P＝L。
可选地，上述图5-图11的实施例中提到的采样点的能量之和可以为采样点的归一化能量之和，即第一终端设备在计算第一参考信号的采样点的能量之和时需要进行归一化处理。第一终端设备可以利用接收到的第二信号的采样点组成的序列与第二信号对应的本地的第一参考信号组成的序列进行内积，然后再除以与第二信号对应的本地的第一参考信号组成的序列与自身(与第二信号对应的本地的第一参考信号组成的序列)的内积。
上述方法图5-图11的实施例中描述的是训练网络设备的发送波束，本申请实施例也同样适用于训练第一终端设备的接收波束。在训练第一终端设备的接收波束的过程中，网络设备采用固定的波束发送第一参考信号，第一终端设备切换波束接收第一参考信号。第一终端设备采用相同的波束接收每个时域周期中的具有准共址关系的采样点。网络设备发送的第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系， 这样第一终端设备测量第一参考信号的能量，根据第一参考信号的能量在接收波束中确定第二目标波束，为了避免赘述本申请实施例不详细描述确定第二目标波束的过程。可选地，在训练第一终端设备的接收波束的过程中，若第二指示信息指示的第一时域符号为接收波束训练对应的时域符号，则网络设备需要在第一时域符号之前向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息和第二指示信息。
上述描述的是网络设备与终端设备通信过程中的方法，本申请实施例也可以适用于D2D场景，下面结合图12描述D2D场景下的方法1200。方法1200中，第一设备可以为第三终端设备、第二设备可以为第四终端设备、第四设备可以为第五终端设备，如图12所示方法1200包括：
S1210，第五终端设备广播第六指示信息，第三终端设备接收第六指示信息。第六指示信息用于指示第一时域符号。
可选地，第六指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在的帧的帧索引，第一时域符号所在的帧内的时隙的时隙索引以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第六指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在时隙相对于第五终端设备发送第六指示信息的时隙的时隙偏移以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。
可选地，第一时域符号可以是第一OFDM符号。
可选地，第五终端设备可以通过广播消息在MAC CE或者RRC信令或者第二阶段的侧行链路控制信息(sidelink control information，SCI 2)中发送第六指示信息。
S1220，第五终端设备广播第七指示信息，第三终端设备接收第七指示信息，第七指示信息指示第五终端设备在第一时域符号内发送第二参考信号的资源元素对应的第二梳齿值K和第二梳齿偏移值，K为正整数，第二梳齿偏移值的取值范围为0至K-1。
其中，第一时域符号对应的RE为M*L个RE，M*L/K也可以称为频域栅格的数量，每个频域栅格包括K个RE，也就是说第一时域符号对应M*L个RE。对于第三终端设备而言，M*L个RE可以是由L个频域栅格，每个频域栅格包括M个RE组成。对于第五终端设备而言，M*L个RE可以是由M*L/K个频域栅格，每个频域栅格包括K个RE组成。
可选地，第一梳齿值M与第二梳齿值K可以相同或者不同。本申请实施例不予限制。
可选地，第一梳齿偏移值与第二梳齿偏移值可以相同或者不同，本申请实施例不予限制。
在S1220之前，第五终端设备确定第一时域符号内的W个频域栅格，每个频域栅格中包括K个RE。第五终端设备在每个频域栅格中确定一个RE。这样，W个RE中的每个RE来自一个频域栅格，W个RE中任意两个RE间隔K的整数倍个RE。例如，间隔K个RE，或者2K个RE，或者间隔3K个RE等，K和W为正整数。
可选地，第二梳齿值K与一个频域栅格中包括的RE的数量相等。W个RE中每个RE属于一个频域栅格，W个RE中每个RE在各自的频域栅格中的第二梳齿偏移值相同。例如，如图13所示，第一梳齿值K与第二梳齿值M相同，第一频域栅格的频域资源位于第五终端设备的频域资源或者频带，W个RE包括RE 1，W个RE中每个RE在各自的频域栅格中的梳齿偏移值为2，即第五终端设备在第一个频域栅格的第3个RE上映射第五终端设备将发送的第二参考信号。
可选地，第五终端设备可以通过广播消息在MAC CE或者RRC信令或者SCI 2中发 送第七指示信息。
需要说明的是，第五终端设备映射的第二参考信号可能是发送给其他终端设备的，用于训练第五终端设备的发送波束或者训练其他终端设备的接收波束。例如发送给第六终端设备，也可能发送给第三终端设备或者第四终端设备等，本申请实施例对与第五终端设备训练波束的终端设备不作限定。
可选地，第五终端设备可以在同一个广播消息中同时广播第六指示信息和第七指示信息，第三终端设备可以在同一个广播消息中获取第六指示信息和第七指示信息。可选地，第五终端设备可以在不同的广播消息中广播第六指示信息和第七指示信息，第三终端设备可以在不同的广播消息中获取第六指示信息和第七指示信息。也就是说，本申请实施例对S1210和S1220的顺序没有任何限制。
可选地，第六指示信息和/或第七指示信息还可以指示进行符号内波束训练的对端终端设备的标识，这样，接收到广播消息的终端设备就可以根据标识确定需要与发送第五终端设备进行波束训练。例如，第六指示信息和/或第七指示信息指示第六终端设备的标识。若第三终端设备接收到第六指示信息和/或第七指示信息，根据第六终端设备的标识确定不需要与第五终端设备进行波束训练，即不需要接收第五终端设备发送的第二参考信号。
可选地，若第九终端设备接收到第六指示信息和/或第七指示信息，第九终端设备需要向第十终端设备发送第一信号，则第九终端设备需要根据第六指示信息确定第一时域符号，第九终端设备需要根据第七指示信息指示的第二梳齿值K和第二梳齿偏移值确定W个RE，若W个RE中存在的S个RE属于第九终端设备的频带，则第九终端设备在发送第一信号时设置相应的S个RE为空白RE，S是小于W的正整数，W为正整数。这样，第九终端设备在发送第一信号时，不在S个RE上发送任何信号，若接收到广播消息的第九终端设备不发送任何信号，则不作任何操作。可选地，第十终端设备可以从第九终端设备接收指示第一时域符合、第二梳齿值K和第二梳齿偏移值的指示信息，或者也可以直接从第五终端设备的广播消息中的第六指示信息确定第一时域符号，根据广播消息中第七指示信息确定第一时域符号，从而根据第六指示信息和第七指示信息确定W个RE，并确定属于第九终端设备的频带的S个RE，确定该S个RE为空白RE，从而根据空白RE解调来自第九终端设备的第一信号。
可选地，在S1230之前，第三终端设备确定是否需要在第一时域符号内进行波束训练。若第三终端设备确定需要在第一时域符号内进行波束训练，则执行S1220，否则不执行S1220。例如第三终端设备需要在第二时域符号内进行波束训练，则不执行S1220，而是在第二时域符号内确定P个RE，P个RE中任意两个RE间隔M的整数倍个RE，在第二时域符号内的P个RE映射第一参考信号，并发送给第四终端设备。
S1230，第三终端设备根据第六指示信息指示的第一时域符号和第七指示信息指示的第二梳齿值K和第二梳齿偏移值确定W个RE，W个RE横跨至少两个设备的频域资源，W个RE中任意两个RE间隔K的整数倍个RE，从第三终端设备的频域资源中筛选掉属于W个RE的RE，确定L个RE中的P个RE。
也就是说，第三终端设备在映射向第四终端设备发送的第一参考信号之前，需要在第四终端设备的频域资源或者频带上过滤掉与其他终端设备映射第二参考信号的RE相关联的RE。换言之，需要确保其他终端设备映射第二参考信号的RE不会干扰第三终端设备所 映射的第一参考信号。例如，如图13所示，第三终端设备根据第二梳齿值K(K＝M)和第二梳齿偏移值2确定W个RE。第一个频域栅格中的RE 1为第五终端设备映射第二参考信号的RE，第六终端设备的频带占第一个频域栅格，第四终端设备的频带占第二个频域栅格和第三个频域栅格，由于RE 4和RE 5属于W个RE。因此，第三终端设备需要筛选掉RE 4和RE 5，从而确定P个RE为RE 2和RE 3。
可选地，第三终端设备还可以发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示第一时域符号。可选地，第三终端设备可以发送广播消息，广播消息包括第三指示信息，可选地，第三指示信息还可以指示第四终端设备的标识。可选地，第三终端设备可以向第四终端设备发送第三指示信息。可选地，第三指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在的帧的帧索引，第一时域符号所在的帧内的时隙的时隙索引以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。可选地，第三指示信息具体用于指示第一时域符号所在时隙相对于第三终端设备发送第三指示信息的时隙的时隙偏移以及第一时域符号所在的时隙内的符号索引。
可选地，第三终端设备可以还可以发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息用于指示第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值。可选地，第三终端设备可以发送广播消息，广播消息包括第四指示信息。
可选地，第三终端设备可以在不同的广播消息中广播第三指示信息和第四指示信息。
可选地，第三终端设备可以在同一个广播消息中广播第三指示信息和第四指示信息。若接收到广播消息的第七终端设备需要在第三指示信息指示的第一时域符号上发送第一信号，则第七终端设备需要根据第四指示信息指示的第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值确定L个RE，若L个RE中存在的L-P个RE属于第七终端设备的频带，则第七终端设备在发送第一信号时设置相应的L-P个RE为空白RE，空白RE的描述可以参见方法500中的L-P个RE的描述。这样，第七终端设备在发送第一信号时，不在L-P个RE上发送任何信号，若接收到广播消息的第七终端设备不发送任何信号，则不作任何操作。例如，如图13所示，第L个频域栅格中的RE为第七终端设备的频带或者频域资源，RE L与RE 3或者RE 2间隔M的整数倍个RE。第七终端设备在RE L上不发送任何信号，避免对第三终端设备在RE 2和RE 3上发送第一参考信号造成干扰。
也就是说，在方法1200中，在第三终端设备与第四终端设备训练波束的过程中，由于没有中心调度节点，因此，第三终端设备需要接收其他终端设备(第五终端设备)广播消息中的第六指示信息和第七指示信息，确定其他终端设备可能映射参考信号的RE。第三终端设备在映射向第四终端设备发送的第一参考信号时，需要筛选掉其他终端设备映射参考信号的RE，从而避免其他终端设备映射的参考信号干扰第三终端设备发送给第一终端设备的参考信号，从而可以实现在没有中心调度节点的场景下，第三终端设备确定P个RE的方法。
S1240，第三终端设备在P个RE上映射将要发送给第四终端设备的第一参考信号。其中，P个RE位于第三终端设备的频带。L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE属于其他终端设备的频域资源，且其他终端设备在L个RE中除了P个RE之外的RE上不发送任何信号。
可以理解的是，P个RE也可以理解为第四终端设备的频带，换句话说，第三终端设备和第四终端设备在通信的过程中所使用的频带可以理解为第三终端设备的频带也可以 理解成第四终端设备的频带，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
具体地，S1240中，第三终端设备与S520中网络设备映射将要发送给第一终端设备的第一参考信号类似，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
可选地，L个RE横跨至少两个设备的频域资源，P个RE属于第四终端设备的频域资源，L-P个RE中包括第七终端设备的频域资源。
上述方法1200中，提供用于处理信号的方法。第三终端设备可以根据接收到第五终端设备发送的第六指示信息和第七指示信息确定P个RE，并在P个RE上映射将要发送给第四终端设备的第一参考信号，P个RE中任意两个RE间隔的RE的数量是M的整数倍。第四终端设备可以测量第一参考信号在时域上的不同的采样点实现对不同的波束的测量，从而可以提高测量波束的准确性，也能在一个时域符号内训练多个波束，从而可以降低资源开销。此外，第三终端设备可以发送第三指示信息和第四指示信息，若接收到第三指示信息和第四指示信息的第七终端设备需要在第一时域符号上发送第一信号，则第七终端设备需要根据第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值确定L个RE，若L个RE中存在的L-P个RE属于第七终端设备的频带，则第七终端设备在发送第一信号时设置相应的L-P个RE为空白RE，这样第七终端设备在发送第一信号时，不在L-P个RE上发送任何信号，第七终端设备可以在除了不发送任何信号的L-P个空白RE之外的RE上发送第一信号，这样也能够避免第七终端设备发送的第一信号干扰第三终端设备向第四终端设备发送的第一参考信号，同时也可以提高资源调度的灵活性。若接收到第三指示信息和第四指示信息的第七终端设备不发送任何信号，则不作任何操作。
第三终端设备按照上述方法1200中映射将要向第四终端设备发送的第一参考信号之后，第三终端设备可以在时域上发送第一参考信号对应的采样点，下面描述第三终端设备发送第一参考信号对应的采样点，第四终端设备测量第一参考信号对应的采样点的过程。第三终端设备在第一时域符号内向第四终端设备发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点，每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中第i个采样点具有准共址关系，i的取值为1至L的正整数。
具体地，第三终端设备向第四终端设备发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点的方法与S710中网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点的方法类似，例如，S710中网络设备向第一终端设备的配置信息，则S1200中第三终端设备也可以向第四终端设备发送配置信息，第四终端设备基于配置信息测量第一参考信号，并上报，第三终端设备根据第四终端设备上报的测量信息，确定目标波束，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
可选地，若接收到第三指示信息和第四指示信息的第七终端设备需要在第一时域符号上发送第一信号，则第七终端设备需要根据第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值确定L个RE，若L个RE中存在的L-P个RE属于第七终端设备的频带，则第七终端设备在发送第一信号时设置相应的L-P个RE为空白RE，空白RE的描述可以参见方法500中的L-P个RE的描述，这样第七终端设备在发送第一信号时，不在L-P个RE上发送任何信号，在时域上第七终端设备在第一时域符号上向第八终端设备发送第一信号，第一信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，第一信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点。其中，第七终端设备向第八终端设备发送第一信号的方法参考S720中网络设备向第二终端 设备发送第一信号的方法，为了避免赘述不详细描述。若接收到第三指示信息和第四指示信息的第七终端设备不发送任何信号，则不作任何操作。
上述方法1200描述的是第三终端设备向第四终端设备发送第一参考信号，第七终端设备向第八终端设备发送第一信号，或者第九终端设备向第十终端设备第一信号，对于第四终端设备而言可能会接收到第一参考信号和第一信号混合的第二信号，下面结合图14的方法1400描述第四终端设备处理信号的过程。
S1410，第四终端设备在第一时域符号上接收第二信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，第二信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点。
其中，S1410中的第四终端设备与S910中的第一终端设备类似，S1410中第四终端设备执行的过程参见S910中第一终端设备执行的过程，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
可选地，第四终端设备可以接收第三终端设备定向发送给第四终端设备的第三指示信息，根据第三指示信息确定第一时域符号。可选地，第四终端设备可以接收第三终端设备在广播消息中广播的第三指示信息，第三指示信息还可以指示第四终端设备的标识，第四终端设备根据第四终端设备的标识确定第三指示信息指示的第一时域符号为第三终端设备训练发送波束的时域符号。
S1420，第四终端设备根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量，第一序列包括第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列，第二序列包括第四终端设备本地的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期中L个采样点中第i个采样点。
其中，S1420中的第四终端设备与S920中的第一终端设备类似，S1420中第四终端设备执行的过程参见S920中第一终端设备执行的过程，为了避免赘述不详细描述。
可选地，第七终端设备可能与第九终端设备为同一个终端设备，或者第八终端设备可能与第十终端设备为同一个终端设备也就是说上述为了描述方便采样不同的终端设备描述，实际这些终端设备中可能存在两个终端设备为同一个终端设备的情况。
可选地，上述图12-图14的实施例中提到的采样点的能量之和可以为采样点的归一化能量之和，即第四终端设备在计算第一参考信号的采样点的能量之和时需要进行归一化处理，第四终端设备可以利用接收到的第二信号的采样点组成的序列与第二信号对应的本地的第一参考信号组成的序列进行内积，然后再除以与第二信号对应的本地的第一参考信号组成的序列与自身(与第二信号对应的本地的第一参考信号组成的序列)的内积。
上述图12-图14的实施例中描述的是训练第三终端设备的发送波束，本申请实施例也同样适用于训练第四终端设备的接收波束，在训练第四终端设备的接收波束的过程中，第三终端设备采用特定的波束发送第一参考信号，第四终端设备换波束接收第一参考信号，第三终端设备发送的第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系，这样第四终端设备测量第一参考信号的能量，根据第一参考信号的能量在接收波束中确定目标波束，为了避免赘述本申请实施例不详细描述确定第二目标波束的过程。
上文描述了本申请提供的方法实施例，下文将描述本申请提供的装置实施例。应理解，装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
图15示出了本申请实施例提供的通信装置1500。该通信装置1500包括处理器1510和收发器1520。其中，处理器1510和收发器1520通过内部连接通路互相通信，该处理器1510用于执行指令，以控制该收发器1520发送信号和/或接收信号。
可选的，该通信装置1500还可以包括存储器1530，该存储器1530与处理器1510、收发器1520通过内部连接通路互相通信。该存储器1530用于存储指令，该处理器1510可以执行该存储器1530中存储的指令。在一种可能的实现方式中，通信装置1500用于实现上述方法实施例中的第一设备或网络设备或第三终端设备对应的各个流程和操作。在一种可能的实现方式中，通信装置1500用于实现上述方法实施例中的第二设备或第一终端设备或第四终端设备对应的各个流程和操作。在一种可能的实现方式中，通信装置1500用于实现上述方法实施例中的第三设备或第二终端设备或第七终端设备对应的各个流程和操作。
应理解，通信装置1500可以具体为上述实施例中的第一设备或网络设备或第三终端设备或者第二设备或第一终端设备或第四终端设备或者第三设备或第二终端设备或第七终端设备，也可以是芯片或者芯片系统。对应的，该收发器1520可以是该芯片的收发电路，在此不做限定。具体地，该通信装置1500可以用于执行上述方法实施例中与第一设备或网络设备或第三终端设备或者第二设备或第一终端设备或第四终端设备或者第三设备或第二终端设备或第七终端设备对应的各个操作和/或流程。可选的，该存储器1530可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器，并向处理器提供指令和数据。存储器的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器。例如，存储器还可以存储设备类型的信息。该处理器1510可以用于执行存储器中存储的指令，并且当该处理器1510执行存储器中存储的指令时，该处理器1510用于执行上述与第一设备或网络设备或第三终端设备或者第二设备或第一终端设备或第四终端设备或者第三设备或第二终端设备或第七终端设备对应的方法实施例的各个操作和/或流程。
在实现过程中，上述方法的各操作可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的操作可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的操作。为避免重复，这里不再详细描述。
应注意，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各操作可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、操作及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的操作可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的操作。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行上述方法实施例中第一设备或网络设备或第三终端设备或者第二设备或第一终端设备或第四终端设备或者第三设备或第二终端设备或第七终端设备所执行的各个操作或流程。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序代码，当该程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行上述方法实施例中第一设备或网络设备或第三终端设备或者第二设备或第一终端设备或第四终端设备或者第三设备或第二终端设备或第七终端设备所执行的各个操作或流程。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种通信系统，其包括前述的一个或多个第一设备，以及一个或多个第二设备；或者包括前述的一个或多个第一设备，一个或多个第二设备以及一个或多个第三设备。
上述各个装置实施例中和方法实施例中的完全对应，由相应的模块或单元执行相应的操作，例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的操作，除发送、接收外的其它操作可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以基于相应的方法实施例。其中，处理器可以为一个或多个。
在本申请的实施例中，各术语及英文缩略语均为方便描述而给出的示例性举例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在已有或未来的协议中定义其它能够实现相同或相似功能的术语的可能。
应理解，本文中“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和操作，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装 置和单元的具体工作过程，可以基于前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
在上述实施例中，各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分操作。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (28)

  1. 一种用于处理信号的方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于第一设备，包括：
    确定L个资源元素中的P个资源元素，所述L个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔M的整数倍个资源元素，所述L个资源元素为第一时域符号对应的频域资源，所述L个资源元素横跨至少两个设备的频域资源，所述P个资源元素属于第二设备的频域资源；
    在所述P个资源元素上映射将要发送给所述第二设备的第一参考信号，其中，所述L个资源元素中除了所述P个资源元素之外的资源元素属于其他设备的频域资源，并且不发送任何信号，所述至少两个设备包括所述第二设备和所述其他设备；
    其中，M、L和P为正整数，L大于或等于P。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述第一时域符号内向所述第二设备发送所述第一参考信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，所述第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系，i的取值为1至L中的部分正整数，所述第一设备还用于向第三设备发送第一信号，所述第一信号的M个时域周期对应M*L个采样点，所述第一信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点，所述其他设备包括所述第三设备；
    其中，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列与所述第一信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列正交；
    其中，M和L为正整数。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点和第j个采样点具有准共址关系，j的取值为1至L的中的部分正整数，i不等于j。
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第二设备发送配置信息，所述配置信息用于指示所述第二设备测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的Q个采样点；
    其中，Q为小于或等于L的正整数。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述配置信息包括L个比特，所述配置信息包括的L个比特与所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应，所述配置信息包括的L个比特中的Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值，表示所述第二设备测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述Q个比特一一对应的Q个采样点；所述配置信息包括的L个比特中除了所述Q个比特之外的L-Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第二取值，表示所述第二设备不测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第一测量信息，所述第一测量信息包括L个比特，所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特与所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应，所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特中的第一比特的取值为第三取值，表示所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第一比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系 的采样点的能量之和大于预设值；所述L个比特中的第二比特的取值为第四取值，表示所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和小于或等于预设值，或者表示所述第二设备没有测量所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点。
  7. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述配置信息包括Q个索引，所述Q个索引与所述Q个采样点一一对应。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第二测量信息，所述第二测量信息指示目标索引，所述Q个索引包括所述目标索引，所述每个时域周期中与所述目标索引对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。
  9. 根据权利要求5或7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从所述第二设备接收所述第一时域符号对应的第三测量信息，所述第三测量信息包括所述第一参考信号的每个时域周期中满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
  10. 根据权利要求2至9中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第二设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号内发送的所述第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第二设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述其他设备为第三设备，所述方法还包括：
    发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述L个资源元素对应的第一梳齿值M和第一梳齿偏移值，所述第一梳齿偏移值的取值范围为0至M-1。
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第三设备发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示所述L个资源元素中除了所述P个资源元素之外的资源元素上不映射信号或者在所述L个资源元素中除了所述P个资源元素之外的资源元素上进行打孔。
  15. 根据权利要求1至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第四设备广播的第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息指示所述第一时域符号；
    接收第四设备广播的第七指示信息，所述第七指示信息用于指示所述第四设备在所述第一时域符号内发送第二参考信号的资源元素对应的第二梳齿值K和第二梳齿偏移值，K为正整数，所述第二梳齿偏移值的取值范围为0至K-1。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    根据所述第六指示信息指示的所述第一时域符号和所述第七指示信息指示的所述第二梳齿值K和所述第二梳齿偏移值确定W个资源元素，所述W个资源元素横跨所述至少两个设备的频域资源，所述W个资源元素中任意两个资源元素间隔K的整数倍个资源元素，W为正整数；
    其中，所述确定L个资源元素中的P个资源元素，包括：
    从所述第一设备的频域资源中筛选掉属于所述W个资源元素的资源元素，确定所述L个资源元素中的P个资源元素。
  17. 一种用于处理信号的方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于第二设备，包括：
    在第一时域符号上接收第二信号的M个时域周期对应的M*L个采样点，所述第二信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应L个采样点；
    根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量，所述第一序列包括所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列，所述第二序列包括本地的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中的每个时域周期中的L个采样点中的第i个采样点组成的序列；
    其中，M和L为正整数，i的取值为1至L中的部分正整数。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一序列还包括所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第j个采样点组成的序列，所述第二序列还包括本地的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中的每个时域周期中的L个采样点中的第j个采样点组成的序列，j的取值为1至L中的部分正整数，i不等于j。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从第一设备接收配置信息，所述配置信息用于指示所述第二设备测量所述第二信号中的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的Q个采样点，所述Q个采样点包括所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述配置信息包括L个比特，所述配置信息包括的L个比特与所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应，所述配置信息包括的L个比特中的Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第一取值，表示所述第二设备测量所述第二信号的每个时域周期中与所述Q个比特一一对应的Q个采样点；所述L个比特中除了所述Q个比特之外的L-Q个比特中每个比特的取值为第二取值，表示所述第二设备不测量所述第二信号的每个时域周期中与所述L-Q个比特一一对应的L-Q个采样点。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量之后，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第一设备发送所述第一时域符号对应的第一测量信息，所述第一测量信息包括L个比特，所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特与所述第二信号的每个时域周期对应的L个采样点一一对应，所述第一测量信息包括的L个比特中的第一比特的取值为第三取值，表示所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第一比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值；所述L个比特中的第二比特的取值为第四取值，表示所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与所述第二比特对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和小于或等于预设值，或者表示所述第二设备没有测量所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期中与第二比特对应的采样点。
  22. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述配置信息包括Q个索引，所述Q个索引与所述Q个采样点一一对应。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述根据第一序列与第二序列的内积，确定所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的能量之后，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第一设备发送所述第一时域符号对应的第二测量信息，所述第二测量信息指示目标索引，所述Q个索引包括所述目标索引，所述第二信号中的第一参考信号的每个时域周期的与所述目标索引对应的采样点满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和大于预设值。
  24. 根据权利要求20或22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第一设备发送所述第一时域符号对应的第三测量信息，所述第三测量信息包括满足准共址关系的采样点的能量之和。
  25. 根据权利要求17至24中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从第一设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号内发送第二信号中的第一参考信号的M个时域周期中每个时域周期对应的L个采样点中的第i个采样点具有准共址关系。
  26. 根据权利要求17至25中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从第一设备接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一时域符号。
  27. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令，以使得所述通信装置实现如权利要求1至26中任一项所述的方法。
  28. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时，使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1至26中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2023/083086 2022-03-24 2023-03-22 用于处理信号的方法和通信装置 WO2023179670A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210303709.3 2022-03-24
CN202210303709 2022-03-24
CN202210806902.9A CN116847391A (zh) 2022-03-24 2022-07-08 用于处理信号的方法和通信装置
CN202210806902.9 2022-07-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023179670A1 true WO2023179670A1 (zh) 2023-09-28

Family

ID=88100067

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/083086 WO2023179670A1 (zh) 2022-03-24 2023-03-22 用于处理信号的方法和通信装置

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023179670A1 (zh)

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170033851A1 (en) * 2013-12-20 2017-02-02 Zte Corporation Beam identification method, related device and system in MIMO beamforming communication system
CN108476188A (zh) * 2015-11-02 2018-08-31 三星电子株式会社 在波束形成通信系统中发送或接收参考信号的方法和装置
CN110401470A (zh) * 2017-11-17 2019-11-01 华为技术有限公司 通信方法及装置
US20190363777A1 (en) * 2016-10-03 2019-11-28 Nokia Technologies Oy Reference signal with beamforming training and channel estimation
CN110771105A (zh) * 2017-04-28 2020-02-07 诺基亚技术有限公司 适配于不同子载波间隔配置的频域发射器和接收器
WO2020222621A1 (ko) * 2019-05-02 2020-11-05 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 신호를 송수신하는 방법 및 이를 지원하는 장치
CN112713974A (zh) * 2019-10-25 2021-04-27 成都华为技术有限公司 资源映射方法、设备及存储介质
CN113517914A (zh) * 2020-04-10 2021-10-19 华为技术有限公司 一种波束训练方法及装置

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170033851A1 (en) * 2013-12-20 2017-02-02 Zte Corporation Beam identification method, related device and system in MIMO beamforming communication system
CN108476188A (zh) * 2015-11-02 2018-08-31 三星电子株式会社 在波束形成通信系统中发送或接收参考信号的方法和装置
US20190363777A1 (en) * 2016-10-03 2019-11-28 Nokia Technologies Oy Reference signal with beamforming training and channel estimation
CN110771105A (zh) * 2017-04-28 2020-02-07 诺基亚技术有限公司 适配于不同子载波间隔配置的频域发射器和接收器
CN110401470A (zh) * 2017-11-17 2019-11-01 华为技术有限公司 通信方法及装置
WO2020222621A1 (ko) * 2019-05-02 2020-11-05 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 신호를 송수신하는 방법 및 이를 지원하는 장치
CN112713974A (zh) * 2019-10-25 2021-04-27 成都华为技术有限公司 资源映射方法、设备及存储介质
CN113517914A (zh) * 2020-04-10 2021-10-19 华为技术有限公司 一种波束训练方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NOKIA, ALCATEL-LUCENT SHANGHAI BELL: "On CSI-RS Design for DL Beam Management", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1711304, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Qingdao, P.R. China; 20170527 - 20170530, 26 June 2017 (2017-06-26), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051300498 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210352603A1 (en) Method and apparatus for time and frequency tracking in cellular communication system
EP3883142B1 (en) Sidelink communication method and terminal device
US10623159B2 (en) Data communication method, terminal, and base station
JP2022515415A (ja) サイドリンク通信方法及び端末装置
WO2018202098A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、网络设备和终端设备
KR102466982B1 (ko) 자원 할당 방법, 단말 장치와 네트워크 장치
WO2020164352A1 (zh) 配置信息的方法和装置
CN109219980A (zh) 传输数据的方法和装置
TW201801553A (zh) 傳輸訊號的方法、網路設備和終端設備
CN108886717A (zh) 传输系统信息的方法、基站和终端
EP3697146B1 (en) Wireless communication method, network device and terminal device
WO2023179670A1 (zh) 用于处理信号的方法和通信装置
CA3046134C (en) Method for demodulating shared reference signal, terminal device, and network device
CN116847391A (zh) 用于处理信号的方法和通信装置
WO2023024967A1 (zh) 资源配置方法及装置
WO2024007335A1 (zh) 无线通信方法、装置、设备及存储介质
WO2024032232A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
CN116195214B (zh) 一种干扰控制方法及装置
WO2022155824A1 (zh) 参考信号的传输方法和通信装置
WO2024152939A1 (zh) 一种调度信息的确定方法及装置
WO2024130713A1 (zh) 一种信号处理的方法和通信装置
WO2022206271A1 (zh) 一种确定资源的方法和装置
WO2024208299A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2023181556A1 (ja) 端末、基地局及び通信方法
WO2023066202A1 (zh) 参考信号的资源映射方法与装置、终端和网络设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23773917

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023773917

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2023773917

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20241002